Toyota 2011 Tundra Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2011-Tundra-Owners-Manual-763182 toyota-2011-tundra-owners-manual-763182 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 753 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

716

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

2WD Two Wheel Drive

4WD Four Wheel Drive

ABS Anti-Lock Brake System

ACC Accessory

AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence shifting

ALR Automatic Locking Retractor

A-TRAC Active Traction Control

AUTO LSD Automatic Limited Slip Differential

CAL Calibration

CRS Child Restraint System

ECU Electronic Control Unit

EDR Event Data Recorder

ELR Emergency Locking Retractor

FFV Flexible Fuel Vehicle

GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating

GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating

GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

I/M Emission inspection and maintenance

INFO Information

LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

LED Light Emitting Diode

LT Light truck

M + S Mud + Snow

MMT Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether

OBD On Board Diagnostics

PWR Power

717

RES Resume

RSCA Roll Sensing of Curtain shield Airbags

SRS Supplemental Restraint System

TIN Tire Identification Number

TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System

TRAC Traction Control

TWI Treadwear indicators

TWR Trailer Weight Rating

VIN Vehicle Identification Number

VSC Vehicle Stability Control

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

For your information

Main Owners Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equip-

ment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for

equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we

reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ

from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound

coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel

evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota

vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota

does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their

performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to,

or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.

Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In

addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification

may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could

affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequen-

tial multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake sys-

tem, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check

with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions

regarding installation.

Scrapping your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain

explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt

pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be

sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner

removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota

dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-

nents may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-

trol batteries.

CAUTION

nGeneral precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-

ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-

cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and

reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in

death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other

drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-

tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or

reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,

your occupants or others.

nGeneral precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to

have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with

the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or

extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

Symbols used in illustrations

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the

warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in

order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or

its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must

or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota

and its equipment.

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do

not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning,

etc.) used to operate switches and

other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation

(e.g. a lid opens).

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,

mirrors, and steering column.

2When driving Driving, stopping, and safe-driving information.

Interior and

exterior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-

terior features for a comfortable driving experience.

4Maintenance

and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-

yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

5When trouble

arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat

tire, or is involved in an accident.

6Vehicle

specifications Detailed vehicle information.

7For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt and

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners and

camper information.

Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this

manual.

Headlight

high beam

P. 212

Pictorial index Exterior

Hood

P. 532

Windshield wipers

P. 217

Front turn signal/parking

lights/daytime running

lights∗

P. 189, 212, 214

Front fog lights∗

P. 216

Headlight

low beam

P. 212

Front side marker

lights

P. 212

Regular Cab models

Outside rear view mirrors

P. 89

Tires

lRotation

lReplacement

lInflation pressure

lInformation

P. 547

P. 612

P. 554, 665

P. 672

Fuel filler door

P. 107

Back window∗

P. 98

Side doors

P. 47

∗: If equipped

Tailgate

P. 52

License plate lights

P. 212

Stop/tail and rear side

marker lights

P. 212

Rear turn signal

lights

P. 189

Cargo lamps

P. 450

Headlight

high beam

P. 212

Pictorial index Exterior

Hood

P. 532

Windshield wipers

P. 217

Front turn signal/parking

lights/daytime running

lights∗

P. 189, 212, 214

Front fog lights∗

P. 216

Headlight

low beam

P. 212

Front side marker

lights

P. 212

Double Cab models

Outside rear view mirrors

P. 89

Tires

lRotation

lReplacement

lInflation pressure

lInformation

P. 547

P. 612

P. 554, 665

P. 672

Fuel filler door

P. 107

Back window∗

Power back window∗

P. 98

P. 99

Side doors

P. 47

∗: If equipped

Tailgate

P. 52

License plate lights

P. 212

Rear turn signal

lights

P. 189

Cargo lamps

P. 450

Stop/tail and rear side

marker lights

P. 212

Headlight

high beam

P. 212

Pictorial index Exterior

Hood

P. 532

Windshield wipers

P. 217

Front fog lights∗

P. 216

Headlight

low beam

P. 212

Front side marker

lights

P. 212

CrewMax models

Outside rear view

mirrors

P. 89

Moon roof∗

P. 102

Front turn signal/parking

lights/daytime running

lights∗

P. 189, 212, 214

Tires

lRotation

lReplacement

lInflation pressure

lInformation

P. 547

P. 612

P. 554, 665

P. 672

Fuel filler door

P. 107

Power back window

P. 99

Side doors

P. 47

∗: If equipped

Tailgate

P. 52

License plate lights

P. 212

Rear turn signal

lights

P. 189

Cargo lamps

P. 450

Stop/tail and rear side

marker lights

P. 212

Pictorial index Interior

Seat belts

P. 75

SRS driver airbag

P. 119

Head restraints

P. 71

SRS side airbags

P. 119

Floor mats

P. 498

SRS front

passenger

airbag

P. 119

Armrest∗2

P. 496

Front seats

P. 58

Console box

P. 455

Rear seats∗1

P. 63

Glove boxes

P. 453

Front separated type seats

Rear cup holders∗2

P. 470

Bottle holders

P. 471

Horn

P. 191

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 86

Sun visors

P. 478

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 119

Vanity mirrors∗3

P. 479

Type A

Personal light∗2/

interior light∗5

P. 448

Rear seat entertainment

system∗4

P. 381

Personal/interior

lights

P. 448

Moon roof switches∗4

P. 102

Overhead console

P. 467

Compass∗3

P. 510

Garage door opener switches∗3

P. 503

∗4: If equipped on CrewMax models

∗1: Double Cab and CrewMax models

∗2:CrewMax models ∗5: Double Cab models

∗3: If equipped

Rear view monitor system∗3

P. 229

Personal light∗3

P. 448

Type B (If equipped on Double Cab and CrewMax models)

Pictorial index Interior

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 86

Sun visors

P. 478

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 119

Vanity mirrors∗1

P. 479

Rear seat entertainment

system∗2

P. 381

Personal/interior

lights

P. 448

Overhead console

P. 467

Compass∗1

P. 510

Garage door opener switches∗1

P. 503

Rear view monitor system∗1

P. 229

Door lock

switch

P. 48

Power window

switches

P. 94

Window lock

switch

P. 96

Inside door lock

button

P. 48

Driving position memory

switches∗4

P. 68

Auxiliary box

P. 473

∗1: If equipped

∗2: If equipped on CrewMax models

∗3:CrewMax models

∗4: If equipped on Double Cab and

CrewMax models

Map holder

P. 460

Front cup holders

P. 468

Shift lever

P. 184

Shift lock override button

P. 630

Pictorial index Interior

Double Cab models

Power outlet

P. 483

Rear cup holders

P. 470

CrewMax models

Power outlet (12V DC)

P. 483

∗: If equipped

A/V input port∗

P. 407

Power outlet (115V AC)∗

P. 488

Pictorial index Interior

Seat belts

P. 75

SRS driver airbag

P. 119

Head restraints

P. 71

SRS side airbags

P. 119

Floor mats

P. 498

SRS front

passenger

airbag

P. 119

Armrest∗3

P. 496

Front seats

P. 58

Rear seats∗2

P. 63

Glove boxes

P. 453

Front bench type seat

Rear cup holders∗3

P. 470

Bottle holders

P. 471

Horn

P. 191

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 86

Sun visors

P. 478

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 119

Vanity mirrors∗1

P. 479

Type A

Personal light∗3/

interior light∗5

P. 448

Rear seat entertainment

system∗4

P. 381

Personal/interior

lights

P. 448

Moon roof switches∗4

P. 102

Overhead console

P. 467

Compass∗1

P. 510

Garage door opener switches∗1

P. 503

∗3:CrewMax models

∗1: If equipped

∗2: Double Cab and CrewMax models

∗4: If equipped on CrewMax models

∗5: Double Cab models

Rear view monitor system∗1

P. 229

Personal light∗3

P. 448

Type B (If equipped on Double Cab and CrewMax models)

Pictorial index Interior

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 86

Sun visors

P. 478

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 119

Vanity mirrors∗1

P. 479

Rear seat entertainment

system∗2

P. 381

Personal/interior

lights

P. 448

Overhead console∗4

P. 467

Compass∗1

P. 510

Garage door opener switches∗1

P. 503

Rear view monitor system∗1

P. 229

∗1: If equipped

∗2: If equipped on CrewMax models

∗3:CrewMax models

Door lock

switch∗1

P. 48

Power window

switches∗1

P. 94

Window lock

switch∗1

P. 96

Inside door lock

button

P. 48

Auxiliary box∗1

P. 473

∗4: If equipped on Double Cab models

Shift lever

P. 184

Shift lock override

button

P. 630

Pictorial index Interior

TOW HAUL switch∗

P. 187

Auxiliary box

P. 473

Front cup holders

P. 468

Pen holder

P. 463

∗: If equipped

Auxiliary box

P. 473

Double Cab models

Pictorial index Interior

Power outlet

P. 483

Rear cup holders

P. 470

CrewMax models

∗: If equipped

Power outlet (12V DC)

P. 483

A/V input port∗

P. 407

Power outlet (115V AC)∗

P. 488

Pictorial index Instrument panel

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch∗1

P. 212

P. 189

P. 216

Windshield wipers and

washer switch

P. 217

Parking brake pedal

P. 190

Gauges and meters

P. 192

Hood lock release lever

P. 532

Tire pressure warning reset

switch

P. 548

Passenger airbag off

switch∗2

P. 131

SRS knee

airbag

P. 119

SRS knee airbag

P. 119

Air conditioning

system

P. 301

Power outlet

P. 483

Outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗3/ outside rear view mirror

defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗3

P. 309

Accessory meter

P. 209

AUX port/USB port∗1

P. 343, 349, 360

Vehicles with manual air conditioning system (front separated type seats)

Back window defogger switch∗4/ back window defogger and outside rear

view mirror defogger switch∗5/ back window defogger, outside rear view

mirror defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗5

P. 311

Security indicator∗1

P. 112, 114

Audio system

Navigation system*

P. 314

∗3: If equipped on Regular Cab and

Double Cab models

∗1: If equipped

∗2: Regular Cab models ∗5: If equipped on CrewMax models

∗4: CrewMax models

*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”

Air conditioning

system

P. 301

Bottle holders

P. 471

Outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗2/ outside rear view mirror

defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗2

P. 309

Accessory meter

P. 209

AUX port/USB port∗1

P. 343, 349, 360

Vehicles with manual air conditioning system (front bench type seat)

Back window defogger switch∗3/ back window defogger and outside rear

view mirror defogger switch∗4/ back window defogger, outside rear view

mirror defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗4

P. 311

Security indicator∗1

P. 112, 114

Audio system

Navigation system*

P. 314

Pictorial index Instrument panel

Seat heater

switches∗1

P. 492

Air conditioning

system

P. 292

Power outlet

P. 483

Outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗5/ outside rear view mirror

defogger and front windshield wiper de-icer switch∗6

P. 309

Accessory meter

P. 209

AUX port/USB port∗1

P. 343, 349, 360

∗3: CrewMax models

∗1: If equipped

∗2: If equipped on Regular Cab and Double Cab

models

∗5: Double Cab models

∗4: If equipped on CrewMax models

*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system

Back window defogger and outside rear view mirror defogger switch∗3/

back window defogger, outside rear view mirror defogger and front

windshield wiper de-icer switch∗4

P. 311

∗6: If equipped on Double Cab models

Security indicator

P. 112, 114

Audio system

Navigation system*

P. 314

Seat heater and

ventilator switches∗1

P. 494

Pictorial index Instrument panel

Emergency flasher switch

P. 588

TOW/HAUL switch∗1

P. 187

Accessory meter

control switches∗1

Multi-information display

control switches∗2

P. 209

P. 203

Intuitive parking assist

switch∗1

P. 223

Front-wheel drive control

switch∗3

P. 236

Front separated type seats

∗1: If equipped

∗2: Vehicles with multi-information display

∗3: 4WD models

Front bench type seat

Emergency flasher switch

P. 588

Accessory meter

control switches∗1

P. 209

Intuitive parking assist

switch∗1

P. 223

Front-wheel drive control

switch∗3

P. 236

Power outlet

P. 483

Instrument panel

Pictorial index

VSC OFF switch

P. 240, 245, 246, 247

Audio remote control switches∗1

P. 362

Power back window switch∗2

P. 99

Talk switch∗1

P. 421

Cruise control

switch∗1

P. 220

Telephone switches∗1

P. 421

Engine (ignition)

switch

P. 181

Instrument panel light

control dial

P. 197

Outside rear view mirror

switches∗1

P. 89

Tilt steering lock release lever∗3/

tilt and telescopic steering lock

release lever∗4

P. 83

Personal/interior light

main switch

P. 447

Cargo lamp main switch

P. 450

RSCA OFF switch∗6

P. 133

Tilt and telescopic steering

control switch∗5

P. 85

∗1: If equipped

∗2: If equipped on Double Cab and CrewMax

models

∗3: Front bench type seat

∗4: Vehicles without driving position memory

(front separated type seats)

∗5: Vehicles with driving position memory

Headlight leveling dial∗1

P. 213

∗6: 4WD models only

QUICK REFERENCE

GUIDE

CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE CENTER

1-800 -331- 4331

2011

00505-QRG11-TUN

Printed in U.S.A. 7/10

10-TCS-03989

TUNDRA

10%

Cert no. SGSNA-COC-005612

122362M2.indd 1122362M2.indd 1 7/19/10 3:15 PM7/19/10 3:15 PM

2011

Tundra

!A word about safe vehicle operations

This Quick Reference Guide is a summary of basic vehicle

operations. It contains brief descriptions of fundamental

operations so you can locate and use the vehicle’s main

equipment quickly and easily.

The Quick Reference Guide is not intended as a substitute for

the Owner’s Manual located in your vehicle’s glove box. We

strongly encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual and

supplementary manuals so you will have a better understanding

of your vehicle’s capabilities and limitations.

Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota Motor Sales,

U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years of satisfied driving in your

new Tundra.

This Quick Reference Guide is not a full description of Tundra

operations. Every Tundra owner should review the Owner’s

Manual that accompanies this vehicle.

Pay special attention to the boxed information highlighted in

color throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe

operating instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment

malfunction.

All information in this Quick Reference Guide is current at

the time of printing. Toyota reserves the right to make

changes at any time without notice.

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:29 PM Page COV2

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Spare tire & tools

Tool location

Removing the spare tire

(1) Assemble the jack handle.

(2) Insert the jack handle end into the lowering screw.

(3) Turn the jack handle counterclockwise.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and jack positioning

procedures.

Regular cab models

-behind the right seatback

Double cab models

-under the right rear seats

with storage box

Tool bag

Jack

Tool bag

Jack

Tool bag

Jack

Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to be opened only from

the outside.

Rear door

Double cab models

-under the right rear seats

without storage box

Doors-Child safety locks

(CrewMax and double cab models)

CrewMax models

-behind the right rear seatback

Tool bag

Jack

(1) (2)

(3)

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:33 PM Page 29

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

INDEX

Engine maintenance 8

Fuel tank door release and cap 7

Hood release 7

Indicator symbols 4-5

Instrument cluster 4

Instrument panel 2-3

Keyless entry16

Light control-Instrument panel 6

Accessory meter 25

Air Conditioning/Heating 20-21

Audio 22-23

Automatic Transmission 9

Bottle holders 26

Cruise control 25

Cup holders 27

Door locks 10

Four-wheel drive 10

Garage door opener (HomeLink®)321

Lights1& turn signals 16

Mirrors-Power side view 10

Moonroof 12

Multi-information display218

Parking brake 18

Power outlets-12V DC 17

Power outlets-115V AC 17

Rear seat entertainment system 24

Seat adjustments-Front 12-13

Seat adjustments-Rear 13

Seat heaters and ventilators 19

Seats-Folding 14-15

Seats-Head restraints 14

Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)26

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 11

“TOW/HAUL” switch 11

VSC OFF button 24

Window-Rear 19

Windows-Power 19

Windshield wipers & washers 15

Doors-Child safety locks 29

Seat belts 28

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor 28

Spare tire & tools 29

Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System 28

OVERVIEW

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

SAFETY AND

EMERGENCY FEATURES

1Visit your Toyota dealer for information on customizing this feature.

2 Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for instructions and

more information.

3HomeLink®is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 1

OVERVIEW

Instrument panel

Steering wheel audio controls1

Telephone controls1

Voice command button1,2

Headlight, turn signal and front fog light1controls

Ignition switch

VSC OFF button

Power back window switch1

Emergency flasher button

Multi-information display/Accessory meter control buttons1

Intuitive parking assist button1

Wiper and washer controls

Accessory meter

Theft deterrent/Engine immobilizer system indicator1

Audio system or navigation system-integrated audio system2

Outside rearview mirror/Back window defogger/Windshield wiper de-

icer button1

Front passenger seat belt reminder

Front passenger occupant classification indicator or front passenger

airbag ON/OFF indicator1

Seat heater controls1

Steering wheel controls

(if equipped)

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 2

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Bench seat with manual

Air Conditioning System

Front passenger airbag manual ON/OFF

switch1 (in glove box)

Air Conditioning controls

12V DC Power outlet

AUX port/USB port1

“TOW/HAUL” button1

Two-wheel/Four-wheel drive selector1

Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning)

System reset

Cruise control1

Interior light/Personal light main switch

Instrument panel light control

“RSCA OFF” switch1

Headlight leveling dial1

Cargo lamp switch

Power rearview mirror controls1

Separate seat with manual

Air Conditioning system

1 If equipped

2 For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.”

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 3

OVERVIEW

Indicator symbols

Instrument cluster

Tachometer (if equipped)

Service indicator and reminder

Speedometer

Fuel gauge

Voltmeter (if equipped)

Oil pressure gauge (if equipped)

Engine coolant temperature

Trip meter reset knob

Odometer and two trip meters

Multi-information display

Automatic Transmission shift position indicator

Automatic Transmission shift range display

Automatic Transmission fluid temperature gauge (if equipped)

Without multi-information display

With multi-information display

Driver/Front passenger seat belt reminder

(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)

Charging system warning1

Brake system warning1

For details, refer to “Indicators and warning lights,” Section 2-2, 2011

Owner’s Manual.

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 4

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Low engine oil pressure warning1

Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1

Engine oil replacement reminder1

Front passenger occupant classification or front passenger airbag

ON/OFF indicator

Anti-lock Brake System warning1

Headlight low/high beam indicator

Turn signal indicator

High/Low speed four-wheel drive indicator

Slip indicator1

Vehicle Stability Control OFF indicator1

TOW/HAUL mode indicator1

AUTO Limited Slip Differential indicator1

Cruise control indicator

Automatic Transmission fluid temperature warning1

Low Tire Pressure Warning1

Theft deterrent/Engine immobilizer system indicator

Low fuel level warning

Open door warning

Roll Sensing Curtain Airbags OFF indicator1

Airbag SRS warning1

Master warning

Low windshield washer fluid level warning1

1If indicator does not turn off within a few seconds of starting engine, there may be a

malfunction. Have vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Power steering warning light1

Traction Control OFF indicator

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 5

OVERVIEW

Keyless entry

Panic button

NOTE: If a door is not opened within 60 seconds of unlocking, all doors will

relock for safety.

Push

Push and hold

Push ONCE: Driver door

TWICE: All doors

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

Light control-Instrument panel

Brightness

control

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 6

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Fuel tank door release and cap

Hood release

Pull up latch and

raise hood

Pull

NOTE: Tighten until one click is

heard. If the cap is not tightened

enough, Check Engine “ ”

indicator may illuminate.

Pull

Store

Turn to open

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 7

OVERVIEW

Windshield washer fluid tank

Engine oil level dipstick

Engine coolant reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Power steering fluid reservoir

NOTE: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will

help extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance.

Please refer to the “Warranty Maintenance Guide.”

Engine maintenance

4.0L 6 cylinder (1GR-FE) engine

4.6L 8 cylinder (1UR-FE) and

5.7L 8 cylinder (3UR-FE/3UR-FBE) engines

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 8

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Automatic Transmission

* The engine switch must be set at “ON” and the brake pedal depressed to

shift from Park.

Shift the shift lever to “S” position from “D” position.

Floor shift type:

+: Upshift (push and release)

-: Downshift (pull and release)

Column shift type:

+: Upshift (push and release)

-: Downshift (push and release)

Downshifting increases power going uphill, or provides engine braking

downhill. For best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, always

drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.

“S” (Sequential) mode

Floor shift type

Column shift type

Park*

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

“S” mode

“S” “D”

Park*

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

“S” mode

+ (“S” mode)

-(“S” mode)

+ (“S” mode)

-(“S” mode)

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 9

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Four-wheel drive (if equipped)

High speed (2WD)

High speed (4WD)

Turn to “4H” with speed below 62 mph.

Low speed (4WD)

Shift to “N” position when stopped, then push and turn to “4L.”

For best fuel economy and performance under normal driving conditions,

keep in “2WD” position.

Push

and turn

Turn

Mirrors-Power side view (if equipped)

Fold mirrors in

Return mirrors to

original position

Adjust

Select left or right

Key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Door locks (if equipped)

Lock

Unlock

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 10

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Hold wheel, push lever down, set angle and length, and return lever.

Manual

Tilt steering wheel Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

Tilt and telescopic (if equipped)

steering wheel

Length

Lock release lever

Angle

Push the control switch, set angle and length.

NOTE: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion.

Power

Angle

Control switch

“TOW/HAUL” switch (if equipped)

“TOW/HAUL” mode can be used when carrying heavy loads. As fuel

economy is reduced while in “TOW/HAUL” mode, deactivating when

driving without a load is recommended.

Refer to the Owner‘s Manual for more details on this system before

attempting to use it.

Floor shift type

System ON/OFF

Column shift type

System

ON/OFF

Length

Toward the

driver

Away from

the driver

Down

Angle

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 11

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seat adjustments-Front

Manual seat

Separate seat

-Regular cab model

Separate seat

-Double cab and CrewMax models

Moonroof (if equipped)

Sliding operation Tilting operation

Open Tilt

Close Close

Bench seat

Push once to open/close completely. To stop partway, press the switch

lightly.

* Double cab and CrewMax models only

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 12

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Seat position (forward/backward)

Seatback angle and fold

Seat position (forward/backward)

Seatback angle

Seat cushion angle

Seat height

Lumbar support (if equipped)

Seatback angle (side)

Seatback angle (center)

Leg support (if equipped)

Seat position, cushion angle and height

Power seat

Seat adjustments-Rear

(CrewMax models)

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 13

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seats-Folding

Front (regular cab model)

(1) Pull (2) Pull

Seats-Head restraints

Front-Separate seat

Lock release button

(1)

(2)

Rear (double cab model)

Front-Bench seat

Lock release button

Rear (CrewMax model)

Lock release button

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 14

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Rear (double cab model)

(2)

(3) Lift up

Pull

(2)

(1) Stow

(3) Pull and

fold down

Rear (CrewMax model)

Windshield wipers & washers

With intermittent wiper

Interval wipe

Single wipe

Slow

Fast

Pull to wash

and wipe

(1) Stow

Without intermittent wiper

Single wipe

Slow

Fast

Pull to wash

and wipe

Adjust frequency*

* Intermittent windshield wiper frequency adjustment

Rotate to increase/decrease wipe frequency.

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 15

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Lights & turn signals

Turn signals

Headlights

High beam flasher

Low beam

Front fog lights (if equipped)

Headlights

-Daytime Running Light system (DRL) Automatically turns on the front

turn signal lights upon starting engine and releasing parking brake.

-Automatic light cut off system Automatically turns lights off after a

delay of 30 seconds, or the lock switch on remote may be pushed

after locking.

Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.

Parking lights

Right turn

Turn

Lane change

Left turn

High beam

Auto*

* If equipped

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 16

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Power outlets-12V DC (if equipped)

Separate seats

Bench seat

Instrument panel

Back of the center console box

(CrewMax model)

Instrument panel Inside of the center console box

Back of the front center seat

(CrewMax model)

Key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position to be used.

Power outlets-115V AC (if equipped)

Back of the center console box Back of the front center seat

Back of the center console box

Back of the front center seat

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 17

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Multi-information display (if equipped)

Push “INFO” to change information in the following:

(1) Zoom display of odometer and trip meter

(2) Average gas mileage

(3) Current gas mileage

(4) Miles left on remaining fuel

(5) Running time from engine start

(6) Average vehicle speed

Push “SETUP” to customize to the following settings:

(1) UNIT

(2) KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK

(3) KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER

(4) KEYLESS ENTRY ALL DOORS UNLOCK

(5) DOOR AUTO LOCKING

(6) DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING

(7) HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER

(8) COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER

(9) LANGUAGE

(10) DEFAULT SETTING

Parking brake

Set: Depress

Release: Depress again

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 18

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Windows-Power (if equipped)

Window lock switch

Automatic operation (driver side only) Push the switch completely down

or pull it completely up and release to fully open or close.* To stop

window midway, lightly push the switch in the opposite direction.

Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver’s window

remains operable.

* Not all models equipped with one-touch close function.

Window-Rear (if equipped)

Close Open

Up Down

Driver side

Driver seat Front passenger seat

Seat heaters and ventilators

(if equipped)

Double Cab model CrewMax model

Close Open

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 19

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Air Conditioning/Heating

Fan speed

Automatic climate control ON

Adjusting the temperature setting will cause the airflow vents, air

intake and fan to adjust automatically.

Air Conditioning ON/OFF

Temperature selector (driver side)

Windshield defogger (fresh air only)

Airflow vent

In “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ” indicator “OFF”) to reduce

window fogging.

Temperature selector (front passenger side)

“DUAL” button

Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings for driver and

passenger.

Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature settings for driver and

passenger.

Outside rearview mirror/Back window defogger

Recirculate cabin air (fresh air when OFF)

Climate control OFF

Automatic Air Conditioning

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 20

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Manual Air Conditioning

Fan speed

Air Conditioning ON/OFF

Recirculate cabin air (fresh air when OFF)

Temperature selector (front passenger side)

Synchronize with driver side temperature setting

Airflow vent selector

In “ ” or “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ” indicator “OFF”) to

reduce window fogging.

Temperature selector (driver side)

Select for maximum cooling. Air intake will automatically be set to

recirculate.

Garage door opener (HomeLink®)*

(if equipped)

Garage door openers manufactured under license from HomeLink®* can

be programmed to operate garage doors, estate gates, security lighting, etc.

Refer to “Garage door opener,” Section 3-8 in the Owner’s Manual for

more details.

For programming assistance, contact HomeLink®at 1-800-355-3515, or

visit http://www.homelink.com.

* HomeLink®is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 21

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Type 2 additional functions

Type 3 (with JBL speakers)

Audio

Eject CD

Push to turn

ON/OFF

View CD

information

Push to adjust

tone, balance

& ASL*

Seek station/

CD track select

Station/CD

track scan

Mode

View MP3

folder and/or

satellite radio

category type

Preset buttons - functions in other

modes indicated above number

Load CD(s)

Type 1

Push to skip

up/down

MP3 folder

CD PLAYER

To scan tracks on a disc Push and hold “SCAN.” Push again to hold

selection.

CD changer (Type 3 only)

-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.

-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until you hear a beep.

Insert one disc. Shutter will close and then re-open for next disc.

To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn “TUNE.FILE” or “TUNE SCROLL.”

To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push either side of “TYPE FOLDER.”

* Automatic Sound Leveling

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 22

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

“ ”

Use to search within the selected audio medium (radio, CD, iPod®, etc.).

“MODE”

Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode. Push and hold to turn

audio system OFF.

Steering wheel switches (if equipped)

RADIO

To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset

button (1-6 or one of ) until you hear a beep. Push desired preset

button (1-6 or one of ) to select.

To scan stations Push and hold “SCAN” to scan preset stations. Push again

to hold selection.

AUX port

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX port, you can listen to music from

a portable audio device through the vehicle’s speaker system while in

AUX mode.

USB port (if equipped)

By connecting a USB-compatible portable audio device or USB memory

to the USB port, you can listen to music from the portable audio device

or USB memory through the vehicle’s speaker system while in USB

mode.

AUX port/USB port

Volume control

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 23

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Rear seat entertainment system

(if equipped)

Front audio system

DVD player

DVD screen

Remote control

Power outlet

A/V input port

Separate seats

Bench seat

The VSC OFF button is used to switch between modes related to the TRAC,

VSC and Auto LSD functions.

Refer to Section 2-4 of the Owner’s Manual for more information.

VSC OFF button

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:38 PM Page 24

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Cruise control (if equipped)

1 The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing the brake pedal.

2 The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph.

Turning system ON/OFF

Functions

System ON/OFF

Accessory meter

Outside temperature/Cruise information display (if equipped)

Clock

Hour set

Minute set

Change information (if equipped)

“SELECT RESET” button (if equipped)

“SETUP” button (if equipped) to customize unit

Refer to your Owner’s Manual for complete details on this system before

attempting to use it.

Increase speed

Decrease speed

Cancel1

Resume2

Set

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:39 PM Page 25

Bottle holders

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Bluetooth®technology allows dialing or receipt of calls without taking

hands from the steering wheel or using a cable to connect the telephone

and the system.

Refer to “Using the hands-free telephone system,” Section 3-5 in the

Owner’s Manual for more details, or go to Toyota.com and enter

“Bluetooth” in the keyword search.

Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)

(if equipped)

Microphone

Audio unit Steering wheel telephone switches

Volume

Start call

End call

Voice command

button

Rear door

(CrewMax model)

Rear door

Instrument panel Front door

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:39 PM Page 26

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Cup holders

Separate seat Bench seat

Front center seat

Center console

Back of the center console box

(double cab model)

Back of the front center seatback

(double cab model)

Rear seat

CrewMax model

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:39 PM Page 27

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be

re-extended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature

is used to help hold child restraint systems securely.

To find more information about seat belts, and how to install a child

restraint system, refer to the Owner's Manual.

baT

elkcuB

Keep as low on

hips as possible

Take up slack

Too high

Seat belts

Push up, or squeeze

lock release to lower

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor

(CrewMax and double cab models)

System reset initialization

1. Push and hold “ SET” button

until the indicator blinks

three times.

2. Wait several minutes to allow

initialization to complete.

Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning)

System

After adjusting tire pressures, or after tires have been rotated or

replaced, turn the ignition switch to “ON” and press and hold the

“ SET” button until indicator blinks three times. Let the vehicle sit for a

few minutes to allow initialization to complete.

Refer to the load label on the door jamb or the Owner’s Manual for tire

inflation specifications.

If the tire pressure indicator flashes for more than 60 seconds and then

remains on, take the vehicle to your local Toyota dealer.

NOTE: The warning light may come on due to temperature changes or

changes in tire pressure from natural air leakage. If the system has not

been initialized recently, setting the tire pressures to factory

specifications should turn off the light.

122362M1.qxd:122362M1 7/16/10 5:39 PM Page 28

1-1. Key information

Keys

nWhen required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P. 453)

nKey number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the

event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using

the key number plate. (→P. 633)

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Vehicles without engine immobilizer system

Master keys

Key number plate

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system

Master keys

Key number plate

1-1. Key information

Before driving

NOTICE

nTo prevent key damage (vehicles with engine immobilizer system)

lDo not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high tempera-

tures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

lDo not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any mate-

rial that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Wireless remote control∗

∗: If equipped

nOperation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors

have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

nPanic mode

nDoor lock buzzer

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to

lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the

vehicle once more.

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-

cle from outside the vehicle.

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Pressing the button unlocks

the driver’s door. Pressing the

button again within 3 seconds

unlocks the other doors.

Pushing and holding:

Sounds alarm

When is pushed for longer than

about one second, an alarm will sound for

about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights

will flash to deter any person from trying

to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, push any button on the

wireless remote control.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

nWireless remote control battery depletion

The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted

even if the wireless remote control is not used.) If the wireless remote control

function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery

when necessary. (→P. 563)

nIf the wireless remote control does not operate

Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the key. (→P. 47)

nSecurity feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is

unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

nAlarm (if equipped)

Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system.

(→P. 114)

nConditions affecting operation

The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-

ing situations.

lNear a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facil-

ity that generates strong radio waves

lWhen carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-

nication device

lWhen multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity

lWhen the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by a

metallic object

lWhen a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby

lWhen the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as

a personal computer

nWhen riding in an aircraft

When bringing a wireless remote control onto an aircraft, make sure you do

not press any buttons on the wireless remote control while inside the aircraft

cabin. If you are carrying a wireless remote control in your bag etc, ensure

that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button

may cause the wireless remote control to emit radio waves that could inter-

fere with the operation of the aircraft.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

nCustomization

lThat can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-informa-

tion display)

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control) can be changed.

(Customizable features →P. 683)

lIt is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information dis-

play) (Feature customization →P. 205)

nCertification for wireless remote control

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

Side doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the wireless remote

control, key or door lock switch.

nWireless remote control (if equipped)

→P. 4 4

nKey

Vehicles without power door lock system

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

Vehicles with power door lock system

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Turning the key a single time in

the driver’s door unlocks the

driver’s door, and turning the

key again unlocks the other

doors.

Vehicles with moon roof

Closes the moon roof

(turn and hold)

Opens the moon roof

(turn and hold)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

nDoor lock switch (if equipped)

Driver’s door lock switch

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Passenger’s door lock switch

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

nInside lock button

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

Pulling the door handle can

open the front door even if the

lock button is in the lock posi-

tion.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside door lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

Vehicles with power door lock system

The door cannot be locked if a front door is open and the key is in

the engine switch.

Rear door child-protector lock (Double Cab and CrewMax models)

The door cannot be opened from

inside the vehicle when the lock

is set.

These locks can be set to prevent

children from opening the rear

doors. Push down on each rear

door switch to lock both rear

doors.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems (vehicles with

power door lock system)

nAutomatic door locking and unlocking functions

lLocking function: All doors are automatically locked when the

vehicle speed goes above about 12 mph (20 km/h).

lUnlocking function: All doors are automatically unlocked when

the shift lever is moved to the P position with the engine started.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

nThe following functions can be set or cancelled:

nSetting and canceling the functions

Vehicles with multi-information display

→P. 2 0 5

Vehicles without multi-information display

To switch between setting and canceling, contact your Toyota

dealer.

Function Operation

Shift position linked

door locking function

Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all

doors.

Shift position linked

door unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.

Speed linked door lock-

ing function

All doors are locked when the vehicle speed

is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or

higher.

Driver’s door linked

door unlocking function

All doors are unlocked when the driver’s

door is opened within 10 seconds after turn-

ing the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK

position.

nWhen locking the doors using the key (vehicles with power door lock

system)

The door cannot be locked if the key is in the engine switch.

nKey reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in

the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key.

nCustomization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. door lock) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 683)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

CAUTION

nTo prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,

resulting in death or serious injury.

lAlways use a seat belt.

lAlways lock the doors.

lEnsure that all doors are properly closed.

lDo not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-

cle and it may result in serious injury or death.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even

if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

lDouble Cab and CrewMax models: Set the rear door child protector locks

when children are seated in the rear seats.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Tailgate

The tailgate can be opened using the tailgate handle. The tailgate

can be locked/unlocked using a key.

nTailgate handle

Pull the handle

Open the tailgate slowly

The support cables will hold

the tailgate horizontal.

After closing the tailgate, try

pulling it toward you to make

sure it is securely locked.

nKey

Unlock with the master key

Lock with the master key

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

Removing the tailgate

nBefore removing the tailgate (vehicles with rear view monitor

system)

These connector covers are used when removing the tailgate, to

prevent the back-up camera wire harness connectors from being

contaminated.

Connector cover (Gray)

Connector cover (White)

Store the connector covers in the

glove box in a plastic bag when

not using.

To disconnect the wire harness

connectors ( and ), depress

small plastic tab on connector

and pull apart from connector .

Tailgate wire harness connec-

tor (White)

Frame wire harness connector

(Gray)

Attach the connector cover

(White) to the frame wire har-

ness connector (Gray).

Connector cover (White)

Frame wire harness connector

(Gray)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Open the tailgate.

Pull out the plastic wire protector

located in the vehicle bed by

pressing the tabs and pulling the

protector.

Plastic wire protector

Pull out the wire harness from

the vehicle bed.

Attach the connector cover

(Gray) to the tailgate wire har-

ness connector (White).

Tailgate wire harness connec-

tor (White)

Connector cover (Gray)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

nRemoving the tailgate

Open the tailgate to the angle

where you can release the

brackets on the support cables

from the lugs on both sides.

Lift the support cable bracket up

and slide it off.

To unhook the support cable

bracket, keep pulling up the clip

on the bracket and unhook the

bracket.

Support cable bracket

Clip

Tilt the tailgate to about 45° from

vertical and pull up the right side

of the tailgate to unhook the right

side.

Tilt the tailgate up to 15°.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Slide the tailgate a little to the

right to unhook the left side.

To attach the tailgate, follow the

removal procedure in reverse

order.

Rear step bumper

Type A

For rear end protection and eas-

ier step-up loading.

To get on the rear step bumper,

use the shaded area in the illus-

tration.

Type B

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

CAUTION

nBefore removing the tailgate (vehicles with rear view monitor system)

Disconnect the wire harness between the back-up camera and the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in serious personal injury or damage to the vehi-

cle components.

nCaution while driving

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious personal injury.

lDo not drive with the tailgate open.

lDo not get on the rear step bumper.

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to the tailgate wire harness (vehicles with rear view

monitor system)

Do not pull out all of the tailgate wire harness before open the tailgate.

nTo prevent damage to the camera lens (vehicles with rear view monitor

system)

Store the removed tailgate with the back-up camera lens facing upward.

nAfter closing the tailgate

Try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked.

nTo prevent damage to the rear step bumper

Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Manual seats (Separated type seats)

Seat position adjustment lever

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Double Cab and CrewMax models

Driver’s seat vertical height adjustment lever

Driver’s seat cushion (front) angle adjustment knob

Driver’s seat lumbar support adjustment switch (if equipped)

Passenger’s seat Driver’s seat

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Manual seat (Bench type seat)

Seat position adjustment

levers

Seatback angle adjustment

levers

Center seat seatback angle

adjustment lever

Double Cab and CrewMax

models

Driver’s seat vertical height

adjustment lever

Driver’s seat cushion (front)

angle adjustment knob

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Power seat

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Driver’s seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch

Driver’s seat vertical height adjustment switch

Driver’s seat leg support adjustment switch (if equipped)

Seat lumbar support adjustment switch (if equipped)

Passenger’s seat Driver’s seat

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Folding passenger’s seat (if equipped on Regular Cab models)

nBefore folding passenger’s seat

Push the seat belt hanger down

as far as it will go when it is in the

raised position.

Pass the seat belts through the

seat belt hanger.

This prevents the shoulder belt

from being damaged.

Make sure that the seat belt is

removed from the hanger before

using it.

nFolding passenger’s seat

Pull the seatback angle adjusting

lever and raise the seatback to

its upright position.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Pull the seatback folding lever

and fold the seatback down.

CAUTION

nSeat adjustment

lBe careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.

lDo not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion

to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply

restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the

shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of

an accident.

lManual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is

locked in position.

nAfter returning the seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

lMake sure the seatback is securely locked.

lCheck that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

lArrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.

nCaution while driving

Vehicles with seatback table: Do not sit on or place anything on the folded

seatback.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Rear seats (Double Cab and CrewMax models)

CrewMax models

Seat position adjustment

lever

Seatback angle adjustment

lever

Double Cab models

The rear seats do not have a

seat adjustment function.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Raising the bottom cushion (Double Cab models)

nBefore raising the bottom cushion

Stow the seat belt buckles.

This prevents the seat belt buck-

les from falling out when you fold

the seatback.

Pass the seat belts through the

seat belt hangers.

This prevents the shoulder belt

from being damaged.

Make sure that the seat belts are

removed from the hangers before

using them.

nRaising the bottom cushion

Raise the bottom cushion up

while pulling the lever until it

locks.

When returning bottom cushion to

its original position, push the bot-

tom cushion down while pulling

the lever until it locks.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Folding down rear seats (CrewMax models)

nBefore folding down rear seats

Stow the rear seat belt buckles.

This prevents the seat belt buck-

les from falling out when you fold

the seatback.

Pass the seat belts through the

seat belt hangers.

This prevents the shoulder belt

from being damaged.

Make sure that the seat belts are

removed from the hangers before

using them.

nFolding down rear seats

Pull the lever to unlock the seat-

back and fold the seatback down

until it locks.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

nWhen adjusting a rear seat (CrewMax models)

lBe careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.

lDo not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion

to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined,

the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the

abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of

death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

lBe careful not to get your hands or feet caught in the seat.

nBefore folding down a rear seat

Do not fold down a rear seat when there are passengers sitting in the rear

seats or when there is luggage placed on/under the rear seats.

nAfter adjusting a seat (CrewMax models)

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

lMake sure that the seat and seatback are securely locked in position by

lightly rocking them back and forth.

lCheck that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seat.

nWhen the seatback is folded/the bottom cushion is raised (Double Cab

models)

Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback or storage box while driving.

nWhen returning the seats to their original position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

lBe careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.

lMake sure the seatbacks and bottom cushions are securely locked. Fail-

ure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.

lCheck that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seat.

lArrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

NOTICE

nWhen folding the seats

lThe seat belts and buckles must be stowed.

lCrewMax models: Do not fold the rear seat seatback forward with the lug-

gage cover hooks attached.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Driving position memory (driver’s seat)∗

∗: If equipped

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat,

steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the

computer’s memory and recalled with the touch of a button.

Two different driving positions can be entered into memory.

nEntering a position into memory

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Turn the engine switch to the ON position.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear

view mirrors to the desired positions.

While pushing the SET button,

push button “1” or “2” until the

signal beeps.

If the selected button has

already been preset, the previ-

ously recorded position will be

overwritten.

nRecalling the memorized position

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Turn the engine switch to the ON position.

Push button “1” or “2” to recall

the desired position.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation

Memorized driving positions can be recalled when you unlock the

driver’s door using the wireless remote control and open the driver’s

door.

nSetting the linked door unlock operation

Set the driving positions into the memory system using the “1”

or “2” buttons. (→P. 6 8 )

Turn the engine switch off then, close the driver’s door.

Push the “1” or “2” button and

the button on the wireless

remote control at the same time

for about 1 second until you hear

a beep.

Open one of the doors.

If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the

doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.

In case the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.

(→P. 11 4 )

nCanceling the linked door unlock operation

Close the driver’s door with the engine switch turned off.

Push the SET button and the button on the wireless

remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you

hear 2 beeps.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

nRetained accessory power

Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column)

can be activated within 30 seconds after the driver’s door is opened, even if

the key is not in the engine switch.

nIf any position memory button is pushed while the adjustments are

being made

The operation will stop. To reactivate the system, push the button (“1” or “2”)

again.

nIf the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions must be reset because the computer’s memory is

erased when the battery is disconnected.

CAUTION

nSeat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear pas-

senger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another seat posi-

tion memory button.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Front separated type seats

Vertical adjustment

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down

while pushing the lock release

button.

Front bench type seat

Vertical adjustment

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down

while pushing the lock release

button.

Rear seat (Double Cab models)

Vertical adjustment

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down

while pushing the lock release

button.

Lock release button

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

nRemoving the front head restraints

nRemoving the rear head restraints

Double Cab models

Rear seat (CrewMax models)

Vertical adjustment

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down

while pushing the lock release

button.

Lock release button

Pull the head restraint up while pushing

the lock release button.

Pull the head restraint up while pushing

the lock release button.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

CrewMax models

nInstalling the front head restraints

nInstalling the rear head restraints

Double Cab models

CrewMax models

Pull the head restraint up while pushing

the lock release button.

Align the head restraint with the installa-

tion holes and push it down to the lock

position.

Press and hold the lock release button

when lowering the head restraint.

Align the head restraint with the installa-

tion holes and push it down to the lock

position.

Press and hold the lock release button

when lowering the head restraint.

Align the head restraint with the installa-

tion holes and push it down to the lock

position.

Press and hold the lock release button

when lowering the head restraint.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

nAdjusting the height of the head restraints

nAdjusting the front center seat (bench type seat) and rear center seat

head restraints (Double Cab and CrewMax models)

Always raise the head restraint one level from the lowermost position when

using.

CAUTION

nHead restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to

do so may result in death or serious injury.

lUse the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

lAdjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

lAfter adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure

they are locked in position.

lDo not drive with the head restraints removed.

Make sure that the head restraints are

adjusted so that the center of the head

restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-

ing the vehicle.

nCorrect use of the seat belts

lExtend the shoulder belt so

that it comes fully over the

shoulder, but does not

come into contact with the

neck or slide off the shoul-

der.

lPosition the lap belt as low

as possible over the hips.

lAdjust the position of the

seatback. Sit up straight

and well back in the seat.

lDo not twist the seat belt.

nFastening and releasing the seat belt

Fastening the belt

Push the tab into the buckle

until a clicking sound is heard.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Releasing the belt

Press the release button.

nUsing front seat belt (Regular Cab models)

Raise the front seat belt

hanger until it locks.

Release button

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

nAdjusting the height of the belt

Front seats (Double Cab and CrewMax models)

Down

Push the lock release button

and slide the height adjuster

down.

Move the height adjuster up as

needed until you hear a click.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat

belt to quickly restrain the occu-

pant by retracting the seat belt

when the vehicle is subjected to

certain types of severe frontal

collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioner may not acti-

vate in the event of a minor frontal

impact, a side impact or a rear

impact.

Rear seats (CrewMax models)

Down

Push the lock release button

and slide the height adjuster

down.

Move the height adjuster up as

needed until you hear a click.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

nEmergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend so that you can move around fully.

nAutomatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then

retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be

extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.

To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once

more. (→P. 148)

nPregnant women

nPeople suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat

belt in the proper way. (→P. 75)

Women who are pregnant should position

the lap belt as low as possible over the

hips in the same manner as other occu-

pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-

pletely over the shoulder and position the

belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact

over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not

only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus

could suffer death or serious injury as a

result of sudden braking or a collision.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

nChild seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult

size.

lUse a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 142)

lWhen the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s

seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 75 regarding seat belt usage.

nReplacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate

for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-

sions.

nSeat belt extender

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.

nWearing a seat belt

lEnsure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

lAlways wear a seat belt properly.

lEach seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt

for more than one person at once, including children.

lToyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always

use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

If your seat belts cannot be fastened

securely because they are not long

enough, a personalized seat belt

extender is available from your Toyota

dealer free of charge.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

CAUTION

nWearing a seat belt

lDo not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seat-

ing position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting

up straight and well back in the seats.

lDo not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

lAlways wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

nAdjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your

shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off

your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an

accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,

sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 77)

nSeat belt pretensioners

lDo not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor

from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt

pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of

a collision.

lIf the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In

that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at

your Toyota dealer.

nChild restraint lock function belt precaution

Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the

belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the

belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

nSeat belt damage and wear

lDo not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be

jammed in the door.

lInspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat

belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

nSeat belt damage and wear

lEnsure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota

dealer.

lReplace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been

involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

lDo not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the

seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.

Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating

properly resulting in death or serious injury.

nBefore using a front seat belt (Regular Cab models)

Make sure the seat belt hanger is secured in the raised position before you

fasten the seat belt.

nUsing a seat belt extender

lDo not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without

the extender.

lDo not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system

because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-

ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

lThe personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when

used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the

one originally intended.

NOTICE

nWhen using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the

extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Steering wheel (manually adjustable type)

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

nTo change the angle

Hold the steering wheel and

press the lever down.

Adjust to the ideal position by

moving the steering wheel

vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever

up to secure the steering

wheel.

nTo change the column length (vehicles with separate type

seats)

Hold the steering wheel and

press the lever down.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

nAfter adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an

accident and resulting in death or serious injury.

Adjust to the ideal position by

moving the steering wheel

horizontally.

After adjustment, pull the lever

up to secure the steering

wheel.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Steering wheel (power-adjustable type)

Auto tilt away

When the key is removed from

the engine switch, the steering

wheel returns to its stowed posi-

tion by moving up and away to

enable easier driver entry and

exit.

Inserting the key into the engine

switch returns the steering wheel

to its original position.

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Down

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by

using the following functions.

Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Normal position

Anti-glare position

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

Adjust the height of the rear view

mirror by moving it up and down.

Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of

vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.

Turns automatic mode ON/

OFF

The indicator comes on when

automatic mode is turned on.

The mirror will revert to the

automatic mode each time the

engine switch is turned on.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

nTo prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view

mirror)

nIf a sun visor interferes with the mirror

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

To ensure that the sensors operate prop-

erly, do not touch or cover them.

Hold and rotate the mirror to adjust the

support.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Outside rear view mirrors

Mirror angle can be adjusted.

Power-adjustable type (Type A)

Select a mirror to adjust.

(L: left or R: right)

Adjust the mirror up, down,

in or out using the switch.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Power-adjustable type (Type B)

Upper part mirror:

Select a mirror to adjust.

(L: left or R: right)

Adjust the mirror up, down,

in or out using the switch.

Lower part mirror:

Adjust the mirror up and

down, in or out by pushing

the mirror surface.

Manually adjustable type

Adjust the mirror up, down, in

or out by pushing the mirror

surface.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Folding back the mirrors

From outside

Push the mirrors towards the

back of the vehicle to fold them.

From inside (if equipped)

Press the switch.

Pressing again will unfold the mir-

rors.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Extending the mirrors (if equipped)

The mirrors can be manually slid

outward to improve visibility

around wide trailers.

nRecommended mirror angle when towing a trailer (vehicles with

extending mirrors)

nMirror operating conditions (if equipped)

The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.

nWhen the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror

defoggers)

Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 309, 311)

Power adjust the upper part of the mir-

ror until an appropriate view is

obtained. It is recommended that the

outer 2/3 of the upper mirror be filled

with images other than the vehicle and

trailer.

Manually adjust the lower part of the

mirror until an appropriate view of the

towed object is obtained. It is recom-

mended that the outer 2/3 of the lower

mirror be filled with images other than

the trailer.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

nAutomatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving posi-

tion memory)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automat-

ically by the driving position memory. (→P. 6 8)

nAuto anti-glare function (if equipped)

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the out-

side rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside

rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (→P. 86)

CAUTION

nWhen driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

lDo not adjust the mirrors while driving.

lDo not drive with the mirrors folded back.

lBoth the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly

adjusted before driving.

nWhen a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your

hand caught by the moving mirror.

nWhen the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear

view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and

burn you.

NOTICE

nIf ice should jam the mirror

Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to

free the mirror.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows∗

∗: If equipped

The power windows can be opened and closed using the following

switches.

Driver’s power window switches (Type A)

Closing

Opening

One-touch opening*

(driver’s window only)

*: Pressing the switch in the

opposite direction will stop win-

dow travel partway.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

Driver’s power window switches (Type B)

Closing

One-touch closing*

Opening

One-touch opening*

*: Pressing the switch in the

opposite direction will stop win-

dow travel partway.

Front passenger power’s window switch (Type A)

Closing

Opening

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Lock switch

Press the switch down to lock

passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent chil-

dren from accidentally opening or

closing a passenger window.

Front passenger’s power window switch (Type B)

Closing

One-touch closing*

Opening

One-touch opening*

*: Pressing the switch in the

opposite direction will stop win-

dow travel partway.

Rear passenger’s power window switch (Double Cab and Crew-

Max models)

Closing

Opening

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

nThe power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

nOperating the power windows after turning the engine switch off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even

after the engine switch is turned to the ACC position or turned off. They can-

not, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

nJam protection function (Type B only)

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,

window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

CAUTION

nClosing the windows

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

lCheck to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

lDo not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in

some instances, even death.

nJam protection function (Type B only)

lNever try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

lThe jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the window fully closes.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Back window∗

∗: If equipped

nClosing the back window

Make sure that the back window is securely closed after closing it.

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Keep the back window closed.

This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also pre-

vents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

The back window can be opened and closed using the lock release

lever.

OPEN/CLOSE

Push the lock release lever

and slide the back window.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

Power back window∗

∗: If equipped

The back window can be opened and closed using the switch.

Double Cab models

Opening

Closing

100

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

nThe power back window can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

nOperating the power back windows after turning the engine switch off

The power back windows can be operated for approximately 43 seconds

even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC position or turned off. They

cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

CrewMax models

Opening

Closing

101

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

CAUTION

nClosing the back window

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

lCheck to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

lDo not allow children to operate the power back window.

Closing a back window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some

instances, even death.

nCaution while driving

Keep the back window closed.

This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also pre-

vents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

102

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof∗

∗: If equipped

Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up

and down.

nOpening and closing

Open

To stop partway, press the

switch lightly.

103

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

nThe moon roof can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

nDoor lock linked moon roof operation

The moon roof can be opened and closed using the key. (→P. 47)

nOperating the moon roof after turning the engine switch off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the

engine switch is turned to the ACC or turned off. It cannot, however, be oper-

ated once either front door is opened.

nJam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing

or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

nTilt up and down

Tilt up

Tilt down

To stop partway, press the

switch lightly.

104

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

nIf the moon roof cannot be closed automatically

Keep the switch depressed.

nSunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade

will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

nMoon roof open reminder function

An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not

fully closed and the engine switch off.

nWhen the battery is disconnected

The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.

Push and hold the switch toward the UP (tilt up) side or (sliding

close) side.

After the moon roof will tilt up and down, release the switch.

To ensure the initialization is complete, make sure automatic open-

ing and closing functions work properly.

105

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

nWhen the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

lIf the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly.

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the (sliding close) switch.*1

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10

seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-

mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and

then release the switch.

lIf the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the UP (tilt up) switch*1 until the moon roof moves

into the tilt up position and stops.

Release the UP (tilt up) switch once and then press and hold the

UP (tilt up) switch again.*1

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up

position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1

second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and

then release the switch.

*1:If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will

have to be performed again from the beginning.

*2:If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second

pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press

and hold the (sliding close) or UP (tilt up) switch, and the

moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second.

Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that

the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-

dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

nCustomization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. moon roof) can be changed.

(Customizable features →P. 683)

106

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

CAUTION

nOpening the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

lDo not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-

cle while it is moving.

lDo not sit on top of the moon roof.

nClosing the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

lCheck to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-

ies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being

operated.

lDo not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.

nJam protection function

lNever try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

lThe jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the moon roof fully closes.

107

Before driving

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

nBefore refueling the vehicle

Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and win-

dows are closed.

nOpening the fuel tank cap

Open the fuel filler door.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly

to open.

108

1-5. Refueling

Closing the fuel tank cap

When installing the fuel tank cap,

turn it until you hear a click.

The cap will turn slightly to the

opposite direction when released.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the

back of the fuel filler door.

nFuel types (Gasoline engine)

Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or

higher)

nFuel types (Flex-fuel engine)

Use unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or

higher), E85, or a blend of these two fuels. (→P. 668)

109

1-5. Refueling

Before driving

nIdentifying flex-fuel vehicles

nFuel tank capacity

Approximately 26.4 gal. (100 L, 22.0 Imp.gal.)

nE85 Fueling Stations (Flex-fuel vehicles)

E85 fueling stations and fuel pumps can be identified by the indication “E85

85% Ethanol”. For more information about fueling stations, please refer to

the U.S. Department of Energy Web site.

http://www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/

nRefueling (Flex-fuel vehicles)

Observe the following precautions when switching fuels, in order to maintain

starting and driving performance.

lDo not change fuels when the fuel level is 1/4 or less.

lAlways add at least 2.6 gal. (10 L) of fuel.

lAfter filling up with fuel, warm up the engine or drive the vehicle for at

least 5 minutes or 7 miles (11 km).

lDo not accelerate rapidly immediately after refueling.

Flex-fuel vehicles can be identified by the

fuel tank cap, which is marked

“FLEXFUEL E85/GASOLINE”.

110

1-5. Refueling

CAUTION

nRefueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

lTouch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static

electricity.

Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel

vapors to ignite.

lAlways hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.

In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause

injury.

lDo not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their

bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.

lDo not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

lDo not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

lDo not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically

charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition

hazard.

nWhen replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your

vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in

death or serious injury.

111

1-5. Refueling

Before driving

NOTICE

nRefueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to

operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s

painted surface.

nTo prevent damage to the fuel filler door

Do not apply excessive force.

nE85 fuel

E85 fuel can be used only in flex-fuel vehicles. Do not add E85 fuel to a gas-

oline-engine vehicle.

Filling a gasoline-engine vehicle with E85 will have a negative impact on

starting and driving performance and will cause damage to the fuel system

components.

112

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system∗

∗: If equipped

nSystem maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

nConditions that may cause the system to malfunction

lIf the key is in contact with a metallic object

lIf the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the

engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in

the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes after

the key has been removed

from the engine switch to indi-

cate that the system is operat-

ing.

The indicator light stops flash-

ing after the registered key

has been inserted into the

engine switch to indicate that

the system has been can-

celed.

113

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

nCertifications for the engine immobilizer system

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZRI-21BTY

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complied with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTICE

nTo ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper

operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

114

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Alarm∗

∗: If equipped

The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry

is detected.

nTriggering of the alarm

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm

is set.

lA locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than

using the wireless remote control door lock function or key.

(The doors will lock again automatically.)

lThe hood is opened.

lVehicles with the glass breakage sensor (if equipped): The

side windows are tapped or broken.

lThe battery is reconnected.

nSetting the alarm system

Close the doors and hood,

and lock all the doors. The

system will be set automati-

cally after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes

from being on to flashing when

the system is set.

nDeactivating or stopping the alarm

lUnlock the doors.

lTurn the engine switch to the ACC or ON position, or start the

engine.

(The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few sec-

onds.)

115

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

nSystem maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

nItems to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure

of the following.

lNobody is in the vehicle.

lThe windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

lNo valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

nTriggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

nPanic mode

→P. 4 4

nWhen the battery is disconnected

Be sure to cancel the alarm system.

If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be

triggered when the battery is reconnected.

lA person inside the vehicle opens a

door or hood.

lThe battery is recharged or replaced

when the vehicle is locked.

116

1-6. Theft deterrent system

nAlarm-operated door lock

lWhen the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to pre-

vent intruders.

lDo not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and

make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing

the battery.

NOTICE

nTo ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper

operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

117

Before driving

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in

the seat. (→P. 5 8 )

Adjust the position of the

seat forward or backward to

ensure the pedals can be

reached and easily

depressed to the extent

required. (→P. 58)

Adjust the seatback so that

the controls are easily oper-

able.

Adjust the tilt and telescopic

positions of the steering

wheel downward so the air-

bag is facing your chest.

(→P. 83, 85)

Lock the head restraint in

place with the center of the

head restraint closest to the

top of your ears. (→P. 71)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(→P. 75)

118

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nWhile driving

lDo not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

lDo not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce

the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of

death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

lDo not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat

tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-

dent. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

nAdjusting the seat position

lDo not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion,

to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the

hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.

lTake care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-

gers are not injured by the moving seat.

lDo not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid

injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

119

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain

types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the

occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the

risk of death or serious injury.

Front airbags

Driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and right front

passenger from impact with interior components.

Knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.

Side and curtain shield airbags

Side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.

Curtain shield airbags

Can help protect primarily the head of outside seat occupants.

120

1-7. Safety information

Airbag system components

Regular Cab models

Double Cab and CrewMax models

121

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based

on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sys-

tem controls airbag deployment power for the driver and right front

passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s

position sensor etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of

the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The

SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The

airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag

sensor.

Front bench type seat: The SRS airbags are designed to protect the

driver and right front passenger, and they are not designed to protect

an occupant in the front center seating position.

In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag sys-

tem triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators

quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion

of the occupants.

Side airbags

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG

OFF indicator lights

Curtain shield airbags

Front passenger airbag

Knee airbags

Side and curtain shield air-

bag sensors

Front airbag sensors

Airbag sensor assembly

Curtain shield airbag sen-

sors (Double Cab and

CrewMax models)

Front passenger’s seat belt

buckle switch

Occupant detection system

(ECU and sensors)

SRS warning light and

RSCA OFF indicator light

RSCA OFF switch

(4WD models only)

Driver’s seat position sen-

sor

Driver airbag

Driver’s seat belt buckle

switch

Passenger airbag off switch

(Regular Cab models)

122

1-7. Safety information

nSRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag

sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield air-

bag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, AIR BAG ON

and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

passenger airbag off switch (Regular Cab models), front seat belt preten-

sioner assemblies, RSCA OFF indicator light, inflators, interconnecting wir-

ing and power sources. (→P. 600)

nIf the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

lBruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying

(inflating) SRS airbag.

lA loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

lParts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)

as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof

side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be

hot.

lThe front windshield may crack.

nOperating conditions (front airbags)

lThe SRS front airbag will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds

the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approxi-

mately 12-18 mph [20-30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does

not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle

strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or

deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.

a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the

bed of a truck, etc.).

lIt is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the

vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front air-

bags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

lThe SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger

sitting in the right front passenger seat. However, the front passenger air-

bag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened,

even if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 135)

123

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

nOperating conditions (side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the

event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force

corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3307 lb.

[1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicu-

lar to the vehicle orientation at an approximately speed of 12-18 mph [20-30

km/h]).

nOperating conditions (side airbags)

The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will activate even if there is no

passenger sitting in the right front passenger seat. (→P. 135)

nOperating conditions (curtain shield airbags)

The SRS curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger

compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side or vehicle roll-

over.

nConditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other

than a collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the

underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situation shown

in the illustration.

lHitting a curb, edge of pavement or

hard surface

lFalling into or jumping over a deep hole

lLanding hard or vehicle falling

lThe angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.

lThe vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

124

1-7. Safety information

nTypes of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is

involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes suffi-

cient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front air-

bags may occur.

nTypes of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag

(side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the

vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a colli-

sion to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is

involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-

speed side collision.

lCollision from the side

lCollision from the rear

lVehicle rollover

lCollision from the side to the vehicle

body other than the passenger com-

partment

lCollision from the side at an angle

lCollision from the front

lCollision from the rear

lVehicle rollover

125

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the

vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if

it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

nWhen to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

lAny of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

lCollision from the front

lCollision from the rear

lPitching end over end

lThe front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an acci-

dent that was not severe enough to

cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

lA portion of a door is damaged or

deformed, or the vehicle was involved

in an accident that was not severe

enough to cause the SRS side airbags

and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

lThe pad section of the steering wheel,

dashboard near the front passenger air-

bag or lower portion of the instrument

panel is scratched, cracked or other-

wise damaged.

126

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nSRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

lThe driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

lThe SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)

of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-

vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the

center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you now sit less than 10

in. (250 mm) away, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.

(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim-

ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of

your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,

non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-

bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

lThe surface of the seats with the side

airbag is scratched, cracked or other-

wise damaged.

lThe portion of the front pillars, rear pil-

lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)

containing the curtain shield airbags

inside is scratched, cracked or other-

wise damaged.

127

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

CAUTION

nSRS airbag precautions

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still

maintaining control of the foot pedals and steering wheel, and your view of

the instrument panel controls.

lThe SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-

bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

lImproperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or

seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small

to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-

tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in

the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are

the safest for infants and children. (→P. 142)

lIf the seat belt extender has been con-

nected to the driver’s seat belt buckle

but the seat belt extender has not also

been fastened to the latch plate of the

driver’s seat belt, the SRS driver’s air-

bag system will judge that the driver is

wearing the seat belt even though the

seat belt has not been connected. In

this case, the driver’s airbag may not

activate correctly in a collision, resulting

in death or serious injury in the event of

collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt

with the seat belt extender.

128

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nSRS airbag precautions

lDo not sit on the edge of the seat or

lean against the dashboard.

lDo not allow a child to stand in front of

the SRS front passenger airbag unit or

sit on the knees of a front passenger.

lDo not drive the vehicle while the driver

or passenger has items resting on their

knees.

lDo not lean against the door, the roof

side rail or the front, side and rear pil-

lars.

lDo not allow anyone to kneel on the

passenger seat toward the door or put

their head or hands outside the vehicle.

129

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

CAUTION

nSRS airbag precautions

lIf the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will

deploys, be sure to remove it.

lDo not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side

airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.

lDo not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-

bag components (→P. 120).

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

lDo not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-

bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

lDo not attach anything to or lean any-

thing against areas such as the dash-

board, steering wheel pad or lower

portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles

when SRS driver, front passenger and

knee airbags deploy.

lDo not attach anything to areas such as

the door, windshield glass, side door

glass, front and rear pillars, roof side

rail or assist grip.

lDo not hang coat hangers or other hard

objects on the coat hooks. All of these

items could become projectiles and

seriously injure or kill you, should the

SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.

lDo not attach any heavy, sharp or hard

objects such as keys or accessories to

the key. The objects may restrict the

SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust

into the driver’s seat area by the force

of the deploying airbag, thus causing a

danger.

130

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nSRS airbag precautions

lIf breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a

door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do

so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

lIf the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel

pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have

them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

nModification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications

without consulting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing

death or serious injury.

lInstallation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.

lRepairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,

instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear

pillars or roof side rails.

lRepairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the

occupant compartment.

lInstallation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kan-

garoo bar etc.).

lModifications to the vehicle’s suspension system.

lDo not use tires or wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended

size. (→P. 665)

lInstallation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD

players.

lModifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.

131

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Passenger airbag off switch (Regular Cab models)

The passenger airbag off switch is designed to disable the front pas-

senger airbag in order to allow usage, if necessary, of the right pas-

senger seat by a member of a passenger risk group identified in

TABLE 1 (→P. 132).

AUTO position

This position makes the front pas-

senger airbag system opera-

tional.

At this time, the indicator light

condition varies depending on the

size of the occupant in the right

passenger seat.

OFF position

The front passenger airbag is dis-

abled.

At this time, the AIR BAG OFF

indicator light will come on.

nOperation of the passenger airbag off switch

Turn the key clockwise to the

AUTO position.

Turn the key counterclock-

wise to the OFF position and

remove it.

If the key is removed at any other

position than OFF, the switch will

automatically return to the AUTO

position.

132

1-7. Safety information

nPassenger risk group

For more detailed information concerning about the passenger risk

group, please contact NHTSA at 1-888-327-4236 or Transport

Canada at 1-800-333-0371.

TABLE 1: A PASSENGER RISK GROUP

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the front seat

because:

• Vehicle has no rear seat;

• Vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant

seat; or

• The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s phy-

sician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that

the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because:

• Vehicle has no rear seat:

• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possi-

ble, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no

space is available in the rear seat(s) of vehicle; or

• The child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physi-

cian, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the

driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which accord-

ing to his or her physician:

• Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger:

and

• Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater

than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the pas-

senger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard, or windshield in a crash.

133

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover (4WD models only)

ON/OFF (hold for a few sec-

onds)

The RSCA OFF indicator turns

on. (only when the engine switch

is in the ON position.)

The roll sensing function for the

curtain shield airbags and seat

belt pretensioners will turn back

on automatically each time the

engine switch is turned to the ON

position.

CAUTION

nWhen the passenger airbag off switch is turned off

lDo not turn the passenger airbag off switch to the OFF position except

when a member of a passenger risk group identified in TABLE 1 is occupy-

ing the right passenger seating position.

lThe front passenger airbag will not inflate in a collision and turning off the

front passenger airbag can reduce the occupant protection which your

vehicle safety systems can provide to you in certain accidents and

increase the likelihood of death or serious injuries.

nThe switch only should be used

In a situation where inflation is not desired (such as during extreme off-road

driving).

nOperating conditions when the RSCA OFF indicator is on

lThe curtain shield airbag and seat belt pretensioner will not activate in a

vehicle rollover.

lThe curtain shield airbag will activate in a severe side impact.

134

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nFor normal driving

Make sure the RSCA OFF indicator is not turned on. If it is left on, the curtain

shield airbag will not activate in the event of an accident, which may result in

death or serious injury.

135

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system. This system detects the conditions of the right front

passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front

passenger.

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

AIR BAG ON indicator light

AIR BAG OFF indicator light

136

1-7. Safety information

Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant

classification system

Regular Cab models

lIndicator/warning light

Condition detected

by the front

passenger occupant

classification

system*1

Passenger

airbag off

switch

position

AIR BAG

ON and

AIR BAG

OFF

indicator

lights

SRS

warning

light

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

reminder

light

Adult*2

AUTO AIR BAG

ON Off Flashing*5

OFF AIR BAG

OFF

Child*3 or child

restraint system*4

AUTO AIR BAG

OFF*6Off Flashing*5

OFF

Unoccupied

AUTO Not

illuminated Off Off

OFF AIR BAG

OFF

There is a malfunc-

tion in the system

AUTO AIR BAG

OFF On Off

OFF

137

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

lDevices

*1: The right passenger on the bench type seat.

*2: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a

smaller adult sits in the passenger seat, the system may recog-

nize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and pos-

ture.

*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system

sits in the passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as

an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the passenger

seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be

installed on the passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 142)

Condition

detected by

the front

passenger

occupant

classifica-

tion sys-

tem*1

Passen-

ger air-

bag off

switch

position

Front

passen-

ger air-

bag

Front

passen-

ger

knee

airbag

Side

airbag

on the

passen-

ger

seat

Curtain

shield air-

bag in the

passen-

ger side

Front pas-

senger’s

seat belt

pretensioner

Adult*2

AUTO Activated

Activated

OFF Deactivated Acti-

vated

Child*3

or child

restraint

sys-

tem*4

AUTO

Deactivated Acti-

vated

Activated

OFF

Unoccu-

pied

AUTO

Deactivated Acti-

vated

Deacti-

vated

OFF

There is

a mal-

function

in the

system

AUTO

Deactivated Acti-

vated Activated

OFF

138

1-7. Safety information

*5: In the event the passenger does not wear a seat belt.

*6: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual for

installing the child restraint system properly. (→P. 148)

Double Cab and CrewMax models

lIndicator/warning light

lDevices

Condition detected

by the front passen-

ger occupant classi-

fication system*1

AIR BAG ON

and AIR BAG

OFF indicator

lights

SRS warning

light

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

reminder light

Adult*2AIR BAG ON Off Flashing*5

Child*3 or child

restraint system*4AIR BAG OFF*6Off Flashing*5

Unoccupied Not illuminated Off Off

There is a malfunc-

tion in the system AIR BAG OFF On Off

Condition

detected by

the front

passenger

occupant

classifica-

tion sys-

tem*1

Front pas-

senger

airbag

Front pas-

senger

knee

airbag

Side

airbag on

the front

passen-

ger seat

Curtain

shield

airbag in

the front

passen-

ger side

Front pas-

senger’s

seat belt pre-

tensioner

Adult*2Activated

Child*3 or

child

restraint

system*4

Deactivated Activated

Activated

Unoccupied Deactivated Activated Deactivated

There is a

malfunction

in the

system

Deactivated Activated Activated

139

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

*1: The right front passenger on the bench type seat.

*2: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a

smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec-

ognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and pos-

ture.

*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system

sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/

her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas-

senger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only

be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.

(→P. 142)

*5: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

*6: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual for

installing the child restraint system properly. (→P. 148)

CAUTION

nFront passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant clas-

sification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

lWear the seat belt properly.

lMake sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted

into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

lMake sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using

the seat belt extender for the right front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG

OFF indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the

seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt

extender after making sure the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If

you use the seat belt extender while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is

illuminated, the front passenger airbag, front passenger knee airbag and

side airbag on the right front passenger side airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.

140

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nFront passenger occupant classification system precautions

lDo not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.

seatback pocket).

lDo not apply pressure to the right front passenger seat by resting hands or

legs on the seatback.

lDouble Cab and CrewMax models: Do not put weight on the front passen-

ger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seat-

back from the rear passenger seat.

lDouble Cab and CrewMax models: Do not let a rear passenger lift the

front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their

legs.

lDo not put objects under the front passenger seat.

lDo not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear

seat or a back wall. This may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be

illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in

the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat or

back wall, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the

rear seat or back wall. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as

possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively

may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

lIf an adult sits in the right front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator

light is illuminated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the

passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and

with the seat belt worn correctly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remains

illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is

not possible, move the right front passenger seat fully rearward.

lWhen it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system

on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front

passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 148)

lDo not modify or remove the front seats.

lDo not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-

wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the

detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

141

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

CAUTION

nFront passenger occupant classification system precautions

lDouble Cab and CrewMax models: Child restraint systems installed on the

rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

lDo not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers

the seat cushion surface.

lDo not attach a commercial seatback table or other heavy item to the back

of the front passenger seat.

lDo not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

142

1-7. Safety information

Child restraint systems

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is

much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

lChoose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is

appropriate to the age and size of the child.

lFor installation details, follow the instructions provided with the

child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(→P. 148)

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types

according to the age and size of the child.

Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be prop-

erly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder

belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the

use of child restraint systems.

143

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat

Booster seat

nSelecting an appropriate child restraint system

lUse a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

lIf a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear

seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 75)

144

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nChild restraint precautions

lFor effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child

must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system

depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is

not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be

crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

lRegular Cab models: Toyota strongly urges use of a proper child restraint

system which conforms to the size of the child.

lDouble Cab and CrewMax models: Toyota strongly urges the use of a

proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed

on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

lRegular Cab models: Never put infant or child age 1 to 12 in a passenger

risk group on the right passenger seat with the passenger airbag off switch

in the AUTO position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid

inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to

the child. If you must put infant or child age 1 to 12 in a passenger risk

group on the right passenger seat, make sure that the passenger airbag

off switch is in the OFF position with the key removed and that the indica-

tor light is on. (→P. 131)

lDouble Cab and CrewMax models: Never install a rear-facing child

restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the AIR BAG OFF

indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the

rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious

injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the

front passenger seat.

145

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

CAUTION

nChild restraint precautions

lRegular Cab models (Bench type seat): Never install a rear-facing child

restraint system on the center seat even if the passenger airbag off switch

is in the OFF position. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid

inflation of the driver airbag could cause death or serious injury to the

child.

lDouble Cab and CrewMax models: A forward-facing child restraint system

may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable.

A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used

in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the

front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and

always move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG OFF

indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could

inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be

killed or seriously injured.

lRegular Cab models: Never install a

rear-facing child restraint system on the

right passenger seat with the passen-

ger airbag off switch in the AUTO posi-

tion. In the event of an accident, the

force of the rapid inflation of the front

passenger airbag can cause death or

serious injury to the child if the rear-fac-

ing child restraint system is installed on

the right passenger seat.

lRegular Cab models: If you must install

a rear-facing child restraint system on

the right passenger seat, make sure

that the passenger airbag off switch is

in the OFF position with the key

removed and that the indicator light is

on.

146

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nChild restraint precautions

lRegular Cab models: A forward-facing child restraint system which

belongs to a passenger risk group should never be installed on the right

passenger seat with the passenger airbag off switch in the AUTO position,

because the force of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious

injury to the child in forward seating position. (→P. 132)

lRegular Cab models (Bench type seat): Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the center seat if it interferes with driving operations such as

changing the shift lever position. In this case, install the child restraint sys-

tem on the right passenger seat.

lDo not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system

on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system

with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not

securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-

ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,

sudden swerve or an accident.

lDo not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side

rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side air-

bags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the force of the rapid inflation

could cause death or serious injury to the child.

lMake sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by

the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If

it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child

in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

nChild restraint lock function belt precaution

Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the

belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the

belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

147

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

CAUTION

nWhen the child restraint system is not in use

lKeep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is

not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compart-

ment.

lIf it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the

vehicle. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sud-

den stop, sudden swerve or accident.

148

1-7. Safety information

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly

secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a

seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is

not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-

dren) system.

Child restraint LATCH anchors

Regular Cab models

LATCH anchors are pro-

vided for the right passen-

ger seat.

Buttons displaying the loca-

tion of the anchors are

attached to the seat.

Double Cab models

LATCH anchors are pro-

vided for the outside rear

seats.

Buttons displaying the loca-

tion of the anchors are

attached to the seats.

CrewMax models

LATCH anchors are pro-

vided for the outside rear

seats.

Buttons displaying the loca-

tion of the anchors are

attached to the seats.

149

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Seat belts equipped with a

child restraint locking mecha-

nism (ALR/ELR belts except

driver’s seat belt) (→P. 79)

Anchor bracket (for top tether

strap)

Regular Cab models

Anchor brackets are pro-

vided for all passenger

seats.

Separated type seat

Bench type seat

Double Cab models

Anchor brackets are pro-

vided for all rear passenger

seats.

CrewMax models

Anchor brackets are pro-

vided for all rear passenger

seats.

150

1-7. Safety information

Installing the child restraint system on the right passenger seat

(Regular Cab models)

When you install a child restraint system which belongs to a passen-

ger risk group on the right passenger seat, do the following proce-

dure.

Turn the passenger airbag off

switch counterclockwise to the

OFF position and remove the

key.

The AIR BAG OFF indicator light

comes on when the front passen-

ger airbag system is off.

(→P. 131)

CAUTION

nRear-facing child restraint system

If you must install a rear-facing child restraint system on the right passenger

seat, make sure that the passenger airbag off switch is in the OFF position

with the key removed and that the indicator light is on.

nForward-facing child restraint system

A forward-facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk

group should never be installed on the right passenger seat with the passen-

ger airbag off switch in the AUTO position, because the force of the deploy-

ing airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child in forward seating

position. (→P. 132)

151

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Installation with LATCH system (Regular Cab models)

nInstalling on the right passenger seat (vehicles without seat-

back table)

Fold the seatback while pulling

the lever. Return the seatback

and secure it at the 1st lock posi-

tion (most upright position).

Adjust the seatback to the 13th

lock position. (→P. 61)

1st lock position

13th lock position

Type A

Latch the hooks of the

lower straps onto the

LATCH anchors and

tighten the lower straps.

If the child restraint has a

top tether strap, the top

tether strap should be

latched onto the top

tether strap anchor.

(→P. 160)

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint

system indicates the presence of

a lower connector system.

Canada only

152

1-7. Safety information

Type B

Latch the buckles onto

the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a

top tether strap, the top

tether strap should be

latched onto the top

tether strap anchor.

(→P. 160)

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint

system indicates the presence of

a lower connector system.

nInstalling on the right passenger seat (vehicles with seatback

table)

Fold down the seatback and

back to the 1st lock position

(most upright position) until it

locks into place. Adjust the seat-

back to the 13th lock position.

(→P. 61)

1st lock position

13th lock position

Canada only

153

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Type A

Widen the slits of the seat

cushion slightly.

Latch the hooks of the

lower straps onto the

LATCH anchors and

tighten the lower straps.

If the child restraint has a

top tether strap, the top

tether strap should be

latched onto the top

tether strap anchor.

(→P. 160)

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint

system indicates the presence of

a lower connector system.

Type B

Widen the slits of the seat

cushion slightly.

Latch the buckles onto

the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a

top tether strap, the top

tether strap should be

latched onto the top

tether anchor. (→P. 160)

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint

system indicates the presence of

a lower connector system.

Canada only

154

1-7. Safety information

Installation with LATCH system (Double Cab models)

Type A

Widen the gap between

the seat cushion and

seatback slightly.

Latch the hooks of the

lower straps onto the

LATCH anchors and

tighten the lower straps.

If the child restraint has a

top tether strap, the top

tether strap should be

latched onto the top

tether strap anchor.

(→P. 162)

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint

system indicates the presence of

a lower connector system.

Canada only

155

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Type B

Widen the gap between

the seat cushion and

seatback slightly.

Latch the buckles onto

the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a

top tether strap, the top

tether strap should be

latched onto the top

tether strap anchor.

(→P. 162)

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint

system indicates the presence of

a lower connector system.

Installation with LATCH system (CrewMax models)

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap

should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 166)

Fold down the seatback and

back to the 1st lock position

(most upright position) until it

locks into place. Adjust the seat-

back to the 8th lock position.

(→P. 63)

1st lock position

8th lock position

Canada only

156

1-7. Safety information

Type A

Widen the gap between

the seat cushion and

seatback slightly.

Latch the hooks of the

lower straps onto the

LATCH anchors and

tighten the lower straps.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint

system indicates the presence of

a lower connector system.

Type B

Widen the gap between

the seat cushion and

seatback slightly.

Latch the buckles onto

the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint

system indicates the presence of

a lower connector system.

Canada only

157

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

nRear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat

Place the child seat on the rear

seat facing the rear of the vehi-

cle.

Run the seat belt through the

child seat and insert the plate

into the buckle. Make sure that

the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt

and then allow it to retract

slightly in order to activate the

ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to

retract only.

158

1-7. Safety information

While pushing the child seat

down into the rear seat, allow the

shoulder belt to retract until the

child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has

retracted to a point where there is

no slack in the belt, pull the belt to

check that it cannot be extended.

nForward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat

CrewMax models: If the child restraint has a top tether strap,

the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap

anchor. (→P. 166)

Place the child seat on the seat

facing the front of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child seat and insert the plate

into the buckle. Make sure that

the belt is not twisted.

159

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Fully extend the shoulder belt

and then allow it to retract

slightly in order to activate the

ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to

retract only.

While pushing the child seat into

the seat, allow the shoulder belt

to retract until the child seat is

securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has

retracted to a point where there is

no slack in the belt, pull the belt to

check that it cannot be extended.

Regular Cab and Double Cab models: If the child restraint has

a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto

the top tether strap anchor.

(→P. 160, 162)

nBooster seat

Place the booster seat on the

seat facing the front of the vehi-

cle.

160

1-7. Safety information

Sit the child in the booster seat.

Fit the seat belt to the booster

seat according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions and insert the

plate into the buckle. Make sure

that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is

correctly positioned over the

child’s shoulder, and that the lap

belt is as low as possible.

(→P. 75)

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button

and fully retract the seat belt.

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Regular Cab models)

Remove the head restraint.

Installing position:

Right side passenger seat

Center passenger seat (Bench

type seat)

161

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Remove the anchor bracket

cover.

Installing position:

Right side passenger seat

Center passenger seat (Bench

type seat)

Store the removed cover in a safe

place such as the glove box.

Right side passenger seat

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top tether

strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is

securely latched.

Center passenger seat (bench type seat)

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top tether

strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is

securely latched.

162

1-7. Safety information

Replace the head restraint.

Installing position:

Right side passenger seat

Center passenger seat (Bench

type seat)

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Double Cab models)

nRight rear seat or center rear seat

Raise the head restraints of right

and center seats.

Pull up the straps of right and

center seats.

163

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Right rear seat

Route the top tether strap

through the routing device as

shown in the illustration.

Make sure the top tether strap is

not twisted.

Routing device

Center rear seat

Route the top tether strap

through the routing device as

shown in the illustration.

Make sure the top tether strap is

not twisted.

Routing device

Right rear seat

Latch the hook onto the inner

anchor strap ring and tighten the

top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is

securely latched.

Inner anchor strap ring

164

1-7. Safety information

Center rear seat

Latch the hook onto the inner

anchor strap ring and tighten the

top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is

securely latched.

Inner anchor strap ring

Lower the head restraints of right

and center seats.

nLeft rear seat

Raise the head restraints of cen-

ter and left seats.

165

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Pull up the straps of center and

left seats.

Route the top tether strap

through the routing device as

shown in the illustration.

Make sure the top tether strap is

not twisted.

Routing device

Latch the hook onto the inner

anchor strap ring and tighten the

top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is

securely latched.

Inner anchor strap ring

Lower the head restraints of cen-

ter and left seats.

166

1-7. Safety information

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (CrewMax models)

Remove the head restraint.

Installing position:

Outside passenger seat

Center passenger seat

Outside passenger seat

Swing the seatback forward

slightly. (→P. 63)

Open the anchor bracket

cover.

Latch the hook onto the

anchor bracket.

Return the seatback to its orig-

inal position.

Make sure the seatback is

securely locked by pushing for-

ward and rearward on the top of

the seatback.

167

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Center passenger seat

Swing the seatback forward

slightly. (→P. 63)

Open the anchor bracket

cover.

Latch the hook onto the

anchor bracket.

Return the seatback to its orig-

inal position.

Make sure the seatback is

securely locked by pushing for-

ward and rearward on the top of

the seatback.

Secure the child restraint using LATCH anchors (→P. 155) or

a seat belt (→P. 157), and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

Replace the head restraint.

Installing position:

Outside passenger seat

Center passenger seat

nLaws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-

tions can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

168

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nWhen installing a booster seat

Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR

lock mode. (→P. 79)

ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or dis-

comfort to the child.

nWhen installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual

and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other

passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden

braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

lDouble Cab and CrewMax models: If

the driver’s seat interferes with the child

restraint system and prevents it from

being attached correctly, attach the

child restraint system to the right-hand

rear seat.

lDouble Cab and CrewMax models:

Adjust the front passenger seat so that

it does not interfere with the child

restraint system.

lOnly put a forward-facing or booster

child seat on the front seat when it is

unavoidable. When installing a forward

-facing or booster child seat on the front

passenger seat, move the seat as far

back as possible even if the AIR BAG

OFF indicator light is illuminated. Fail-

ing to do so may result in death or seri-

ous injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

169

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

CAUTION

nWhen installing a child restraint system

lCrewMax models: When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint

system, move the seat as far back as possible and adjust the seatback as

upright as possible.

lWhen a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s

shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event

of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

lEnsure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not

twisted.

lPush and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is

secure.

lRegular Cab models (bench type seat):

In order to firmly secure the child

restraint system, align the seatback

angle and seat position of the right pas-

senger seat to match the center pas-

senger seat. Otherwise, it could cause

death or injury in an accident.

Same angle

Same position

lCrewMax models: When installing a

child restraint system in the rear center

seat, adjust both seat cushions to the

same position and align seatbacks at

the same angle. Otherwise, the child

restraint system cannot be securely

restrained and this may cause death or

serious injuries in the event of sudden

braking, sudden swerving or an acci-

dent.

Same angle

Same position

170

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

nWhen installing a child restraint system

lAfter securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

lFollow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

lAfter securing the child restraint system, never slide or recline the seat.

nDo not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the

seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause

death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud-

den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

nTo correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects

around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child

restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may

cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of

a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

172

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-

ing.

nStarting the engine (→P. 181)

nDriving

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.

(→P. 184)

Release the parking brake. (→P. 190)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

nStopping

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift

the shift lever to P or N. (→P. 184)

nParking the vehicle

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake. (→P. 190)

Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 184)

When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.

Turn the engine switch off to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your

person.

173

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

Starting on a steep uphill

With the brake pedal depressed, firmly set the parking brake

and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

nDriving in the rain

lDrive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the

windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

lDrive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be

especially slippery.

lRefrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,

because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road

surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

nBreaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended

to observe:

lFor the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

lFor the first 500 miles (800 km):

Do not tow a trailer.

lFor the first 1000 miles (1600 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

nDrum-in disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of

brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-

ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota

dealer perform the bedding down.

174

2-1. Driving procedures

nOperating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability

of the correct fuel. (→P. 657)

CAUTION

nWhen starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine run-

ning. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

nWhen driving the vehicle

lDo not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-

erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake

pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident

that could result in death or serious injury.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-

culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the

vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator

pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake

pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-

ing in an accident.

lDo not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may

cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

lDo not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving

position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering

performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

lIf the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and

check that the back window is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the

vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or

a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately.

175

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

CAUTION

nWhen driving the vehicle

lDo not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the

vehicle is moving.

Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and

may result in a loss of vehicle control.

lDo not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to

an accident.

lDo not turn the engine off while driving.

The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if

the engine is not running.

lUse engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving

down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose

effectiveness. (→P. 184)

lWhen stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking

brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing

an accident.

lDo not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or

outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents

that may result in death or serious injury.

lAlways check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their bod-

ies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

lDo not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-

mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-

speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire

failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer

to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability

tires or not before driving at such speeds.

176

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

nWhen driving on slippery road surfaces

lSudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and

reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

lSudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-

shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an

accident.

lAfter driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make

sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent

the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet

and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in

an accident.

nWhen shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may

cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

nWhen the vehicle is stopped

lDo not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate

suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.

lDo not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space

and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

lIn order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep

depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the

parking brake as necessary.

lIf the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused

by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal

and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

lAvoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause

the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible

material is nearby.

177

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

CAUTION

nWhen the vehicle is parked

lDo not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in

the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following.

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a

fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and

plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the

interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-

cle’s electrical components.

lAlways apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine

and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

lIf the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator turns on/off, the transfer

mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both

the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to

move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and

the buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in

P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the

shifting of the transfer mode. (→P. 238)

lDo not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately

after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

lDo not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it

is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is

running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead

to death or a serious health hazard.

178

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

nExhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and

odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health haz-

ard.

lIf the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed

area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

lThe exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack

caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be

sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in

death or a serious health hazard.

lToyota does not recommend occupying the rear cargo area when it is fitted

with a slide-in camper, camper shell or other type cover while the engine is

running. This caution applies to both driving and stopped or parked situa-

tions with the engine running. Particular care should be taken to prevent

exhaust gases from entering camper bodies, trailers or other enclosures

on or around your vehicle. If exhaust fumes are detected, open all win-

dows and thoroughly ventilate the area.

nWhen taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift

lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire

due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly

ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to

death or a serious health hazard.

nWhen braking the vehicle

lWhen the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one

side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking

brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

179

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

CAUTION

nWhen braking the vehicle

lIf the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other

vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the

pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.

lDo not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted

brakes.

lThe brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the

systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal

should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance

becomes longer.

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

NOTICE

nWhen driving the vehicle

lDo not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during

driving. If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator

pedal depressed, driving torque may be restrained.

lDo not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals

together to hold the vehicle on a hill.

nWhen parking the vehicle

Always put the shift lever in P.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may acceler-

ate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

nAvoiding damage to vehicle parts

lDo not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a

long time.

Doing so may damage the power steering pump.

lWhen driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid

damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

180

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE

nIf you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving (brake pad wear

limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon

as possible.

The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads

and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded.

nIf you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering

wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

lIt may be difficult to control your vehicle.

lThe vehicle will make abnormal sounds.

lThe vehicle will behave abnormally.

Replace a flat tire with a new one. (→P. 612)

nWhen encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may

cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.

lEngine stalling

lShort in electrical components

lEngine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be

sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.

lBrake function

lChanges in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-

mission, transfer (4WD models), differentials, etc.

lLubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

181

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

Engine (ignition) switch

nEngine switch

LOCK

The steering wheel is locked

and the key can be removed.

(The key can be removed only

when the shift lever is in P.)

ACC

Some electrical components

such as the audio system can

be used.

All electrical components can

be used.

START

For starting the engine.

nStarting the engine

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.

Turn the engine switch to the START position and start the

engine.

The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 25 seconds, which-

ever is less. If you turn the engine switch, the engine will keep

cranking for about 30 seconds maximum.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is com-

pletely started.

182

2-1. Driving procedures

nTurning the key from ACC to LOCK

nSteering lock release

nIf the engine does not start (vehicles with engine immobilizer system)

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 112)

nKey reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in

the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key.

CAUTION

nWhen starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the

accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Shift the shift lever to P.

(→P. 184)

Push in the key and turn to the

LOCK position.

When starting the engine, the engine

switch may seem stuck in the LOCK posi-

tion. To free it, turn the key while turning

the steering wheel slightly in either direc-

tion.

183

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

NOTICE

nTo prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the engine switch in the ACC or ON position for long periods if

the engine is not running.

nWhen starting the engine

lDo not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the

starter and wiring systems.

lDo not race a cold engine.

lIf the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine

checked immediately.

184

2-1. Driving procedures

Automatic transmission

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

nShifting the shift lever

Floor shift type

While the engine switch is on, depress the brake pedal and

move the shift lever.

Column-shift type

While the engine switch is on, depress the brake pedal and

move the shift lever.

185

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

Changing shift ranges in S mode

Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.

Floor shift type

Upshifting

Downshifting

nShift position uses

*1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in

D for normal driving.

*2: Selecting shift ranges S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible

gear ranges, control engine braking forces, and prevents unneces-

sary upshifting.

Shift position Function

PParking the vehicle or starting the engine

RReversing

NNeutral

DNormal driving*1

SS mode driving*2

186

2-1. Driving procedures

Column-shift type

Upshifting

Downshifting

The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 (6-speed

models) or 4 (5-speed models) according to vehicle speed. However,

the initial shift range may be set to 3 or 2 (6-speed models) or 3 (5-

speed models) if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was

in the D position. (→P. 188)

nShift ranges and their functions

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher

shift range.

Shift range Function

6-speed models 5-speed models

Automatically selecting gears

between 1 and 6 according

to vehicle speed and driving

conditions.

—

5Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5 according to

vehicle speed and driving conditions.

4Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4 according to

vehicle speed and driving conditions.

3Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3 according to

vehicle speed and driving conditions.

2Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2 according to

vehicle speed and driving conditions.

1Setting the gear at 1.

187

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

TOW/HAUL switch (6-speed models with towing package)

Use TOW/HAUL mode when pulling a trailer or hauling a heavy load.

Floor shift type

Press the TOW/HAUL switch.

The indicator will come on.

Press the switch once more to

cancel the mode.

Column-shift type

188

2-1. Driving procedures

nGear range display when driving in S mode

The current gear range is displayed on the combination meter. (→P. 185)

nWhen driving with the cruise control system (if equipped)

The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to

5 or 4 (6-speed models) or 4 or 3 (5-speed models). (→P. 220)

nIf the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

→P. 630

nIf the S indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer, immediately.

(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)

nAI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according

to the driver performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D posi-

tion. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)

nDownshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may

sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be

possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will

sound twice.)

189

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

Turn signal lever

nTurn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

nIf the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned

out.

Left turn

Right turn

Move and hold the lever

partway to signal a lane

change.

The left hand signal will flash

until you release the lever.

Move and hold the lever

partway to signal a lane

change.

The right hand signal will flash

until you release the lever.

190

2-1. Driving procedures

Parking brake

nParking brake engaged warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the

vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

nUsage in winter time

See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (→P. 261)

NOTICE

nBefore driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components

overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake

wear.

Sets the parking brake*.

(Depressing the pedal again

releases the parking brake.)

At this time, the indicator will

come on.

*: Fully depress the parking

brake pedal with your left

foot while depressing the

brake pedal with your right

foot.

Canada

U.S.A.

191

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

Horn

nAfter adjusting the steering wheel (manually adjustable type)

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

(→P. 83)

To sound the horn, press on or

close to the mark.

192

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

Vehicles with multi-information display

The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the

engine switch is in the ON position.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Voltmeter

Displays the charge state.

Engine oil pressure gauge

Displays the engine oil pressure.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and hold-

ing the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being dis-

played.

193

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

Multi-information display

→P. 203

Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge

Displays the automatic transmission fluid temperature.

194

2-2. Instrument cluster

Vehicles without multi-information display (type A)

Vehicles without multi-information display (type B)

The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the

engine switch is in the ON position.

Tachometer (if equipped)

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

195

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Voltmeter (if equipped)

Displays the charge state.

Engine oil pressure gauge (if equipped)

Displays the engine oil pressure.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and hold-

ing the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being dis-

played.

Odometer/trip meter

Odometer:

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was

last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display differ-

ent distances independently.

Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge (if equipped)

Displays the automatic transmission fluid temperature.

196

2-2. Instrument cluster

Odometer and trip meter display button

Pressing this button switches between odometer and trip meter dis-

plays.

Vehicles with multi-information display

Odometer

Trip meter A*

Trip meter B*

*:Pushing and holding the button

will reset the trip meter.

Vehicles without multi-information display

Odometer

Trip meter A*

Trip meter B*

*:Pushing and holding the button

will reset the trip meter.

197

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Brighter

Darker

Vehicles with multi-information

display

With the dial turned fully up, the

intensity of the instrument panel

lights will not be reduced even

when the tail lights/headlights are

turned on.

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to the engine and its components

lDo not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed.

lThe engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is

in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 637)

nWhile driving

lWhen the voltmeter indicates more than 19 V or less than 9 V, the battery

may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer.

lWhen the engine oil pressure gauge does not work properly, immediately

stop the engine and contact your Toyota dealer.

lWhen the automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge needle continu-

ally points higher than normal, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. (if

equipped)

198

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-

ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-

tems.

nInstrument cluster

Vehicles with multi-information display

Vehicles without multi-information display (type A)

199

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

Vehicles without multi-information display (type B)

nCenter panel

200

2-2. Instrument cluster

nIndicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the

vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(→P. 189)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator

(→P. 212)

Headlight high beam

indicator (→P. 212)

*1AUTO LSD indicator

(→P. 240, 245)

(If equipped)

Security indicator

(→P. 112, 114)

*1,7

RSCA OFF indicator

(→P. 133)

Shift position and shift

range indicators

(→P. 184)

TRAC OFF indicator

(→P. 245, 246, 247)

*1AIR BAG ON indicator

(→P. 135)

*1AIR BAG OFF indicator

(→P. 135)

(If equipped)

Cruise control indicator

(→P. 220) (4WD models)

4HI indicator (→P. 236)

*1,5

Slip indicator

(→ P. 241, 244)

(4WD models)

4LO indicator (→P. 236)

VSC OFF indicator

(

→

P. 240, 245, 246, 247)

(If equipped)

TOW HAUL indicator

(→P. 187)

(U.S.A.)

Headlight indicator

(→P. 212)

201

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

nWarning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the

vehicle’s systems. (→P. 599)

*1:These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the ON

position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They

will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There

may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if

the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer for details.

*2:Vehicles with multi-information display

*3:Vehicles without multi-information display

*4:Vehicles without tachometer

*5:The indicator flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

*6:The indicator comes on to indicate a malfunction.

*7:For 2WD models, even though there is no function of deactivating

the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover, the RSCA OFF indi-

cator turns on briefly when the engine switch is turned to the ON

position. But this is not a malfunction.

(if equipped)

(Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.)

(U.S.A.)

*1,3

*1,4

*1,6

202

2-2. Instrument cluster

CAUTION

nIf a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light

not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems

are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in

death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer

immediately if this occurs.

203

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

Multi-information display∗

Trip information

Display items can be switched by pushing the INFO button.

∗: If equipped

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of

driving-related data.

lTrip information

Displays driving range, fuel

consumption and other cruis-

ing-related information.

lWarning messages

(→P. 608)

Automatically displayed when

a malfunction occurs in one of

the vehicle’s systems.

lOdometer and trip meter

display (→P. 196)

204

2-2. Instrument cluster

Zoom display of odometer and trip meters

Average Fuel Economy

Current Fuel Economy

Distance To Empty

Trip Timer

Displays the odometer and one of the trip meters

simultaneously.

Displays the average fuel consumption since the

function was reset.

The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT

RESET button for more than 2 seconds.

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Displays the estimated maximum distance that

can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

lThis distance is computed based on your average

fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance

that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

lWhen only a small amount of fuel is added to the

tank, the display may not be updated.

Displays the driving time.

To calculate the driving time, press the SELECT

RESET button, and to stop the calculation, press it

again.

To reset the calculation, press the SELECT RESET

button for more than 2 seconds.

205

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

Average Speed

Feature customization

The vehicle can be customized while the vehicle is stopped.

Press the SETUP button to select the item you want to cus-

tomize unit.

UNITS

KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK

KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER

KEYLESS ENTRY ALL DOORS UNLOCK

DOOR AUTO LOCKING

DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING

HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER

COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER

LANGUAGE

DEFAULT SETTING

Displays the average vehicle speed since the

engine was started or the function was reset.

The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT

RESET button for more than 2 seconds.

206

2-2. Instrument cluster

Press the SELECT RESET button to customize the items.

Items Screen text Select in this order

To select

US (ENGLISH)

or METRIC

(→P. 207)

UNITS

Door lock/

unlock warning

function

KEYLESS ENTRY

FEEDBACK

Time for auto-

matic door lock

function

KEYLESS ENTRY

RELOCK TIMER

Double switch

operation to

unlock all the

doors

KEYLESS ENTRY

ALL DOORS

UNLOCK

Automatic door

locking function

DOOR AUTO

LOCKING

Automatic door

unlocking func-

tion

DOOR AUTO

UNLOCKING

Time period

before lights

turn off (if a door

is opened and

closed, and

engine switch is

in ACC or

LOCK)

HEADLAMPS AUTO

OFF TIMER

Time period

before lights

turn off

COURTESY LAMPS

OFF TIMER

Selecting the

language LANGUAGE

METRIC

US (ENGLISH)

LAMPS + TONE*LAMPS

TONE

OFF

60 SECONDS*120 SECONDS

30 SECONDS OFF

2 PRESSES*1 PRESS

SHIFT OUT

OF PARK

ABOVE 12 MPH*

(20 km/h)

OFF

SHIFT TO PARK*DRIVER DOOR

OPEN

OFF

30 SECONDS*60 SECONDS

90 SECONDS

0 SECONDS

15 SECONDS*30 SECONDS

8 SECONDS

ENGLISH FRENCH

SPANISH

207

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

*: Default setting

After customize is complete, press the SETUP button to set

the selected item.

If the customization fails, the previously setting will be displayed.

If no button is pressed for 10 seconds, the display change to normal

display.

Items Screen text Select in this order

Reset to default

setting

HOLD RESET

TO RESTORE

DEFAULT SETTINGS

nTo select the US (ENGLISH) or METRIC

Press the SETUP button to display UNITS on the multi-information

display.

Press the SELECT RESET button to change the units.

Press the INFO or SETUP button and complete the unit change.

nFeature customization error

• If SYSTEM ERROR message is indicated, turn the engine switch off and

then on again.

• If SYSTEM ERROR message is indicated again, contact your Toyota

dealer.

Information US (ENGLISH) METRIC

Average Fuel Economy and

Current Fuel Economy MPG L/100 Km

Distance To Empty MILES Km

Average Speed MPH Km/h

Outside temperature display

on the accessory meter °F °C

208

2-2. Instrument cluster

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Do not adjust the display.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

nThe multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal

information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display

monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

209

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

Accessory meter

Outside temperature display (if equipped)

Displays the outside air temperature. (→P. 481)

Outside temperature and trip information display (if equipped)

Displays the outside temperature and trip information.

(→P. 2 1 0 , 481)

Clock (→P. 480)

H (Hour) button (→P. 480)

M (Minute) button (→P. 480)

INFO button (if equipped)

SELECT RESET button (if equipped)

SETUP button (if equipped)

210

2-2. Instrument cluster

Outside temperature and trip information display (if equipped)

Every time the INFO button is pushed, the display toggles through

these information.

lOUTSIDE (outside temperature display)

lAVG (average fuel consumption after refueling)

lINST (current fuel consumption)

lRANGE (driving range)

lDisplay off

Displays the outside air temperature.

Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehi-

cle was last refueled.

The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT

RESET button for more than 2 seconds.

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be

driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

• This distance is computed based on your aver-

age fuel consumption. As a result, the actual dis-

tance that can be driven may differ from that

displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the

tank, the display may not be updated.

211

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

nThe accessory meter can be operated when

The engine switch must be in the ON position.

nTo select the unit A (English/U.S. customary system) or unit B (metric

unit) (vehicles without multi-information display)

Press the SETUP button to change the units.

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Do not adjust the display.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

Information Unit A Unit B

Average fuel consumption and

current fuel consumption MPG L/100 Km

Driving range MILES Km

Outside temperature °F °C

212

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

OFF

Vehicles with daytime

running light system:

The daytime running

lights turn on.

The side marker, park-

ing, tail, license plate,

daytime running lights

(if equipped) and

instrument panel lights

turn on.

The headlights and all

lights listed above

(except daytime run-

ning lights) turn on.

The headlights, day-

time running lights (if

equipped) and all lights

listed above turn on

and off automatically.

(When the engine

switch is in the ON

position)

Canada

U.S.A.

(if equipped)

213

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push

the lever forward to turn on the

high beams.

Pull the lever back to the center

position to turn the high beams

off.

Pull the lever toward you to

turn on the high beams.

Release the lever to turn them off.

You can flash the high beams

with the headlights on or off.

Manual headlight leveling dial (if equipped)

The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number

of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.

Raises the level of the head-

lights

Lowers the level of the head-

lights

214

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

nGuide to dial settings

Loading condition Control switch position

Towing

Hitch

(Towing

package)

Payload

Regular Cab Double Cab CrewMax

Standard Long Standard Long Short

None None 0 0 0 0 0

None Maximum

load 32323

Maximum

load None 4 3 3 2 3

nDaytime running light system (if equipped)

lTo make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the front turn signal

lights turn on automatically whenever the engine is started and the park-

ing brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at

night.

lCompared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system

offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help

improve fuel economy.

nHeadlight control sensor (vehicles with automatic light control system)

The sensor may not function properly if

an object is placed on the sensor, or any-

thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to

the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor

detecting the level of ambient light and

may cause the automatic headlight sys-

tem to malfunction.

215

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

nAutomatic light off system

lWhen the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights automati-

cally turn off after 30 seconds when all doors are closed with the engine

switch turned to the ACC or LOCK position. (The lights turn off immedi-

ately if the button on the wireless remote control is pressed after all

doors are locked.)

lWhen only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically

with the engine switch turned to the ACC or LOCK position and the

driver’s door is opened.

Vehicles with automatic light control system: If any of the doors is kept open,

the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the ON position, or turn

the headlight switch off once and then back to the or position.

nCustomization

lThat can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-informa-

tion display)

Settings (automatic light off system) can be changed. (Customizable

features →P. 683)

lIt is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information dis-

play) (Feature customization →P. 205)

NOTICE

nTo prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-

ning.

216

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Fog light switch∗

∗: If equipped

nThe fog lights can be turned on only when

The headlights are on low beam.

The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such

as in rain or fog.

OFF

217

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

Windshield wipers and washer

nWithout intermittent type

Low speed windshield wiper

operation

High speed windshield

wiper operation

Temporary operation

Washer operation

218

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

nIntermittent wiper with interval adjuster

Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when

is selected).

Intermittent windshield

wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper

operation

High speed windshield

wiper operation

Temporary operation

Increases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

219

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

nThe windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch must be in the ON position.

nIf no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in

the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

nWhen the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

nWhen there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled

toward you and held continually.

nWhen a windshield washer nozzle becomes blocked

Contact your Toyota dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object.

This may damage the nozzle.

Washer/wiper dual opera-

tion

Wipers will automatically oper-

ate a couple of times after the

washer squirts.

220

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control∗

∗: If equipped

Use cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the acceler-

ator.

Indicator

Cruise control switch

nSet the vehicle speed

Press the ON-OFF button to

turn the cruise control on.

At this time, the cruise control

indicator will come on.

Press the button once more to

deactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate to

the desired speed and push

the lever down to set the

cruise control speed.

221

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

nCruise control can be set when

lThe shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in 4 or 5 in S

mode (5-speed models).

lThe shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in between 4 and

6 in S mode (6-speed models).

lVehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

nAccelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed

resumes.

nAdjusting the speed setting

Increase speed

Decrease speed

Hold the lever until the desired

speed setting is obtained.

Fine adjustment of the set

speed (approximately 1.0 mph

[1.6 km/h]) can be made by

lightly pushing the lever up or

down and releasing it.

nCanceling and resuming regular acceleration

Cancel

Pull the lever towards you to

cancel cruise control.

The speed setting is also can-

celed when the brakes are

applied.

Resume

To resume cruise control and

return to the set speed, push

the lever up.

222

2-4. Using other driving systems

nAutomatic cruise control cancellation

The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.

lActual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)

below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

lActual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

lVSC is activated.

nIf the cruise control indicator flashes

Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control off, and then reactivate

the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels

immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise

control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

nTo avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use.

nSituations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause an

accident resulting in death or serious injury.

lIn heavy traffic

lOn roads with sharp bends

lOn winding roads

lOn slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

lOn steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

lWhen towing a trailer or emergency towing

223

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

Intuitive parking assist∗

∗: If equipped

The intuitive parking assist is designed to inform you of the approxi-

mate distance between your vehicle and an obstruction by indicator

and buzzer when parking the vehicle. This system uses sensors to

detect obstructions.

nSensor types

Back sensors

Rear corner sensors

Front corner sensors

nIntuitive parking assist switch

Press the switch to turn on.

(To turn off, press the switch

again.)

When on, the buzzer sounds

to inform the driver that the

system is operational. At this

time, the indicator will come

on.

224

2-4. Using other driving systems

The distance and buzzer

nWhen a sensor detects an obstacle

The buzzer sounds.

Back sensors

Rear corner sensors

Zone

Distance

shown as

in in. (mm)

Indicator

and buzzer

Far

Approximately

70.9—45.3

(1800—1150)

Intermittent

Mid

Approximately

45.3—33.5

(1150—850)

Fast

intermittent

Near

Approximately

33.5 (850) or

less

Continuous

Zone

Distance

shown as

in in. (mm)

Indicator

and buzzer

Far

Approximately

33.5—20.5

(850—520)

Intermittent

Mid

Approximately

20.5—15.7

(520—400)

Fast

intermittent

Near

Approximately

15.7 (400) or

less

Continuous

225

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

Front corner sensors

nWhen two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously

The buzzer system responds to the nearest zone.

nWhen multiple obstacles are detected in front and behind the

vehicle at the same time

The buzzer will change in the following manner.

lIf an obstacle has been detected within 15.7 in. (400 mm) of the

front or 33.5 in. (850 mm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous

buzzer is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected at the other

end of the vehicle, the buzzer will sound 7 times then one contin-

uous buzzer.

lIf an obstacle has been detected within 15.7 in. (400 mm) of the

front or 33.5 in. (850 mm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous

buzzer is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected in the same

way at the other end of the vehicle, the buzzer will sound 3 times

then one continuous buzzer.

Zone

Distance

shown as

in in. (mm)

Indicator

and buzzer

Far

Approximately

23.6—15.7

(600—400)

Intermittent

Mid

Approximately

15.7—9.8

(400—250)

Fast

intermittent

Near

Approximately

9.8 (250) or

less

Continuous

226

2-4. Using other driving systems

Sensors that operate and detection range

The following diagrams show the sensor detection range. Note that

sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close

to the vehicle.

nDetection range of the sensors

Back sensors

Rear corner sensors

Front corner sensors

Perceptible area

Approx. 70.9 in. (1800 mm)

Approx. 33.5 in. (850 mm)

Approx. 23.6 in. (600 mm)

The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sen-

sors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehi-

cle.

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object

etc.

227

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

nThe Intuitive parking assist system can be operated when

lFront corner sensors:

• The engine switch is in the ON position.

• The shift lever is in R.

• The shift lever is not in P or R and vehicle speed is approximate 6 mph

(10 km/h) or less.

lBack and rear corner sensors:

• The engine switch is in the ON position.

• The shift lever is in R

nSensor detection information

lCertain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect

the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances

where this may occur are listed below.

• There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.

• A sensor is frozen.

• A sensor is covered in any way.

• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.

• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle

engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing

ultrasonic waves.

• There is another vehicle equipped with intuitive parking assist sensors

in the vicinity.

• A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.

• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.

• A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.

• The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.

• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.

• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.

Objects lower than the sensors or thin stakes etc. may be detected ini-

tially, but as they draw closer, they may cease to be detected.

• A towing hitch is mounted to the vehicle.

• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is

installed.

• When attaching a two-way radio antenna.

• When the bumper is damaged.

228

2-4. Using other driving systems

In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of

their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer

than they are.

lThe shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay

particular attention to the following obstacles:

• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves

• Sharply-angled objects

• Low obstacles

• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction

of your vehicle

• A person near the vehicle (depending on the type of clothes worn)

• When the bumper is damaged.

nCertification (Canada only)

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

nIf the indicator is continuously on

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

nIf the indicator remains blinking but do not sound the buzzer

Clean the sensors with soft cloth.

CAUTION

nCaution when using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely

and possibly cause an accident.

lDo not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

lDo not attach any accessories within the sensor range.

NOTICE

nNotes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

229

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

Rear view monitor system∗

∗: If equipped

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an

image of the area behind the vehicle. The image is displayed in

reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to the

one on the inside rear view mirror.

The rear view image is dis-

played on the inside rear view

mirror.

The screen is turned off if any

one of the following conditions

are met:

• The shift lever is shifted out

of R

• The screen remains on for 5

minutes

Shift lever

Screen

230

2-4. Using other driving systems

nRear view monitor guide lines

lGuide lines are displayed on the monitor.

Vehicle width extension guide lines (blue)

These lines indicate the estimated vehicle width extension.

Distance guide line (blue)

This line indicates a position on the ground about 3 ft. (1 m) behind on the

ground of the rear bumper of your vehicle.

Distance guide line (red)

This line indicates a position on the ground about 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind on

the ground of the rear bumper of your vehicle.

Vehicle center guide lines (blue)

These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

231

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

nThe rear view monitor system can be operated when

The shift lever is in R and engine switch is ON.

nDisplay mode

The rear view monitor display mode can be adjusted when the engine switch

is in the ON position and the shift lever is in R.

lTo temporarily turn off the monitor when it is on.

Push the button. The indicator should turn orange.

The monitor will automatically turn on again after the ignition is turned off

and on.

lTo manually turn on the monitor when it is turned off.

Push the button. The indicator should turn green.

lTo select a display language (English, French, or Spanish).

Push and hold the button for 6 to 12 seconds.

The monitor should turn on and the indicator should turn green.

Push the button.

Each time the button is pushed and released, the language

will change. The warning message should flash 5 seconds after the

button is released, indicating that the change has been completed.

lTo permanently disable the monitor.

Push and hold the button for 12 to 15 seconds.

The monitor will turn off and on after 6 seconds. Continue holding the

button down until the display turns back off.

The indicator should flash orange.

The monitor will not automatically turn on again after the ignition is turned

off and on.

Push the button.

232

2-4. Using other driving systems

nDisplayed area

The area covered by the camera is lim-

ited. Objects that are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the

bumper cannot be seen on the screen.

The area displayed on the screen may

vary according to vehicle orientation or

road conditions.

Corners of bumper

233

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

nRear view monitor system camera

nSmear effect

The rear view monitor system camera is

located on the tailgate as shown in the

illustration.

In the following cases, it may become dif-

ficult to see the images on the screen,

even when the system is functioning cor-

rectly.

lThe vehicle is in a dark area, such

as at night.

lThe temperature near the lens is

extremely high or low.

lWater droplets are on the camera

lens or humidity is high, such as

when it rains.

lForeign matter, such as snow or

mud, adheres to the camera lens.

lThe sun or headlights are shining

directly into the camera lens.

lA bright object such as a white wall

is reflected in the mirror surface

over the monitor.

lWhen the camera has scratches or

dirt on it.

If a bright light, such as sunlight

reflected off the vehicle body, is picked

up by the camera, a smear effect* char-

acteristic to the camera may occur.

*: Smear effect: A phenomenon that

occurs when a bright light is picked

up by the camera; when transmitted

by the camera, the light source

appears to have a vertical streak

above and below it.

234

2-4. Using other driving systems

nFlicker effect

When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury

lights etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

CAUTION

nWhen using the rear view monitor system, observe the following pre-

cautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious inju-

ries

lNever depend solely on the rear view monitor system when reversing.

lAlways check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is

clear.

lAlways check the vehicle surrounding area, because the guide lines are

estimates of distance and location.

lThe guide lines are assistant lines and do not change even if the steering

wheel is turned.

lDepicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual

distances.

lDo not use the system if the tailgate open.

nConditions which may affect the rear view monitor system

lIf the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting

angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

lRapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the

vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

lIf the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with

water and wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild

cleanser and rinse.

lThe displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly

distorted when the system is cold.

nCaution while driving in reverse

Do not change modes while the vehicle is moving.

235

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

NOTICE

lAs the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble

or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

lIf the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water

droplets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a

soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and

rinse.

lDo not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to

adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

lWhen washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the

camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunction-

ing.

236

2-4. Using other driving systems

Four-wheel drive system∗

∗: If equipped

Use the front-wheel drive control switch to select the following

transfer modes.

*1: Vehicles with multi-information display

*2: Vehicles without multi-information display

2WD (high speed position, two-wheel drive)

Normal driving.

4H (high speed position, four-wheel drive)

Greater traction than two-wheel drive.

When you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping.

The 4HI indicator will come on.

4L (low speed position, four-wheel drive)

Driving requiring maximum power and traction such as climbing or

descending steep hills, off-road driving and hard pulling in sand or mud,

etc.

The 4LO indicator will come on.

237

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

Shifting between 4H and 4L

nShifting from 4H to 4L

Stop the vehicle completely.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch fully clock-

wise.

Maintain this condition until the 4LO indicator comes on.

nShifting from 4L to 4H

Stop the vehicle completely.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Turn the front-wheel drive control switch fully counterclock-

wise.

Maintain this condition until the 4LO indicator turns off.

nShifting between 2WD and 4H

Reduce your speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h) and set the front drive

control switch between 2WD and 4H.

When the ambient temperature is 5.0°F (-15°C) or lower, shifting from 2WD

to 4H cannot be performed with the vehicle speed above 43 mph (70 km/h).

nIf the 4HI indicator blinks

lShifting from 2WD to 4H

• If the 4HI indicator starts blinking, drive straight ahead, and try slowing

down or accelerating to allow the system to engage.

• If the 4HI indicator continues to blink and the buzzer sounds, stop the

vehicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h).

Operate the switch again.

lShifting from 4H to 2WD

If the 4HI indicator starts blinking, drive straight ahead, and try slowing

down or accelerating, or driving forward or backward for a short distance,

to allow the system to engage.

238

2-4. Using other driving systems

nIf the 4LO indicator light blinks

lIf the 4LO indicator continues to blink when shifting between 4H and 4L,

stop the vehicle completely, move the shift lever to N and operate the

switch again.

lIf the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator turns on/off, the trans-

fer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages

both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the

vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator

blinks and the buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in

P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the

shifting of the transfer mode.

To complete the shifting, stop the vehicle completely, return the shift lever

to N, and confirm that the shift was completed (The indicator turns on/off).

lIf the engine coolant temperature is too low, the transfer mode may not

be able to be shifted. When the engine is warmer, operate the switch

again.

If the 4LO indicator light continues to blink even after attempting the above,

there may be a malfunction in the engine, the brake system or the four-

wheel drive system. In this case, you may not be able to shift between 4H

and 4L. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

nShifting to 4L

VSC is automatically turned off.

nFour-wheel drive usage frequency

You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 10 miles (16 km) each

month.

This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.

239

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Never operate the front-wheel drive control switch if the wheels are slipping.

Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.

nWhen the vehicle is parked

If the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator turns on/off, the transfer

mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both the

front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move

regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the

buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P.

You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the

shifting of the transfer mode before placing transmission in P. (→P. 238)

240

2-4. Using other driving systems

AUTO LSD system

The AUTO LSD system aids traction by using the traction control

system to control engine performance and braking when one of the

rear wheels begins to spin.

The system should be used only when one of the rear wheels spin-

ning occurs in a ditch or rough surface.

nSystem operation

The system can be used on 2WD models and in 2WD mode on

4WD models.

The system is activated when driving at a speed under 62 mph

(100 km/h).

The AUTO LSD system will be activated with the following two

procedures.

Press the VSC OFF switch

briefly.

At this time, the AUTO LSD

indicator will come on.

To turn off the system, push

the switch again.

Stop the vehicle completely,

and press the VSC OFF

switch for more than 3 sec-

onds.

At this time, the VSC OFF and

AUTO LSD indicators will

come on simultaneously.

To turn off the system, push

the switch again.

241

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

When the AUTO LSD system is operating

Vehicles with multi-information display

If the rear wheels spin, the slip

indicator flashes to indicate that

the AUTO LSD system has con-

trolled the spinning of the rear

wheels.

Vehicles without multi-information display

nIf the engine is turned off and restarted

The AUTO LSD system and the indicators are automatically turned off.

nIf the brake system overheats

The AUTO LSD system will cease operation, and the slip indicator will

change from flashing to being on continuously to alert the driver. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

The system will be automatically restored after a short time.

242

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION

nTo avoid an accident

lDo not use the AUTO LSD system in conditions other than the above.

A much greater steering effort and more careful cornering control will be

required.

lDo not drive with the AUTO LSD system continuously turned on.

243

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-

tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and

should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

nABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if

the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.

nBrake Assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is

depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.

nVSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning

on slippery road surfaces.

nTrailer Sway Control

Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake

pressure for individual wheels and reducing engine torque when trailer

sway is detected.

Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if

VSC is turned off or experiences a malfunction.

nTRAC (Traction Control) for 2WD models and 2WD mode on

4WD models

Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning

when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

nA-TRAC (Active Traction Control) for 4WD mode on 4WD

models

Maintains drive power and prevents all wheels from spinning when

starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

244

2-4. Using other driving systems

When VSC/Trailer Sway Control/TRAC/A-TRAC are operating

Vehicles with multi-information display

If the vehicle is in danger of slip-

ping, or if the rear wheels (2WD

models and 2WD mode on 4WD

models) or all wheels (4WD

mode on 4WD models) spin, the

slip indicator flashes to indicate

that VSC/Trailer Sway Control/

TRAC/A-TRAC have been

engaged.

Vehicles without multi-information display

245

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

To disable VSC, Trailer Sway Control and/or TRAC (2WD models

and 2WD mode on 4WD models)

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC, Trailer Sway

Control and TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels.

You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle

in order to free it.

nTRAC OFF mode

Press the VSC OFF switch

briefly.

The AUTO LSD indicator will

come on.

The system is in TRAC off, AUTO

LSD on and VSC, Trailer Sway

Control on mode.

Push the switch again to turn the

system back on.

nAUTO LSD mode

Stop the vehicle completely, and

press the VSC OFF switch for

more than 3 seconds, when the

system is in the TRAC OFF

mode.

The VSC OFF and AUTO LSD

indicators will come on.

The system is in TRAC off, AUTO

LSD on and VSC, Trailer Sway

Control off mode.

246

2-4. Using other driving systems

nVSC OFF mode

Stop the vehicle completely, and

press the VSC OFF switch for

more than 3 seconds, when the

system is in the AUTO LSD

mode.

The VSC OFF and TRAC OFF

indicators will come on.

The system is all off mode.

To disable VSC, Trailer Sway Control or A-TRAC (4H mode on 4WD models)

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC, Trailer Sway

Control or A-TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels.

You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle

in order to free it.

nA-TRAC OFF mode

Press the VSC OFF switch

briefly.

The TRAC OFF indicator will

come on.

The system is in A-TRAC off and

VSC, Trailer Sway Control on

mode.

Push the switch again to turn the

system back on.

247

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

nVSC OFF mode

Stop the vehicle completely, and

press the VSC OFF switch for

more than 3 seconds.

The VSC OFF and TRAC OFF

indicators will come on.

The system is all off mode.

Push the switch again to turn the

system back on.

To disable A-TRAC (4L mode on 4WD models)

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, A-TRAC may reduce

power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the sys-

tem off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

Stop the vehicle completely, and

press the VSC OFF switch for

more than 3 seconds.

The TRAC OFF indicators will

come on.

Push the switch again to turn the

system back on.

248

2-4. Using other driving systems

nAutomatic reactivation of TRAC, A-TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Con-

trol

Turning the engine switch off after turning off the TRAC, A-TRAC, VSC and

Trailer Sway Control systems will automatically re-enable them.

nSounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, TRAC, A-TRAC, VSC,

Trailer Sway Control and Brake Assist system

lA sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is

started and just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not

indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

lAny of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are

operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

nIf the brake system overheats

TRAC or A-TRAC will cease operation, and the slip indicator will change

from flashing to being on continuously to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in

a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

nShifting to 4L

VSC and Trailer Sway Control are automatically turned off.

249

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

CAUTION

Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause

death or serious injury.

nThe ABS does not operate effectively when

lThe limits of the gripping performance have been exceeded.

lThe vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick

road.

nStopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of nor-

mal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-

ations.

lWhen driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

lWhen driving with tire chains

lWhen driving over bumps in the road

lWhen driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads

nWhen VSC and Trailer Sway Control are activated

The slip indicator flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may

cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator flashes.

nTRAC or A-TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-

pery road surfaces, even if TRAC or A-TRAC is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

nReplacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total

load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the appro-

priate tire pressure level.

The ABS, VSC and Trailer Sway Control will not function correctly if different

tires are fitted on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or

wheels.

250

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION

nHandling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect

the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.

nTrailer Sway Control precaution

The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situ-

ations. Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle,

trailer, road surface, and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control sys-

tem may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s manual for information

on how to tow your trailer properly.

nIf trailer sway occurs

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

lFirmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

lBegin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to

reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle

and trailer should stabilize. (→P. 284)

251

When driving

2-5. Driving information

Off-road precautions

Off-road vehicle feature

lSpecific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity

than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes

this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, it has a signif-

icantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

lAn advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the

road allowing you to anticipate problems.

lIt is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary

passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed

to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp

turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

This vehicle has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in rela-

tion to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of per-

forming in a wide variety of off-road applications.

252

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

nOff-road vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious per-

sonal injury or damage to your vehicle:

lIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die

than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers

should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

lAvoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or

vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

lAvoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicle’s center of

gravity.

lAlways slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher

center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordi-

nary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better con-

trol.

lWhen driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss

of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also

risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

lDo not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or

straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle)

can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

253

2-5. Driving information

When driving

Off-road driving

When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following pre-

cautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the

closure of areas to off-road vehicles.

lDrive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permit-

ted to travel.

lRespect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering

private property.

lDo not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs

that restrict travel.

lStay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving tech-

niques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to

roads.

nAdditional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road,

consult the following organizations.

lState and Local Parks and Recreation Departments

lState Motor Vehicle Bureau

lRecreational Vehicle Clubs

lU.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

254

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

nOff-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious per-

sonal injury or damage to your vehicle:

lDrive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving

in dangerous places.

lDo not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump

could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and espe-

cially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.

lAlways check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in

sand, mud, water or snow.

lAfter driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that

there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped

on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the

vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody,

a breakdown or fire could occur.

lIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die

than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers

should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

lWhen driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss

of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also

risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

255

2-5. Driving information

When driving

NOTICE

nTo prevent the water damage

lTake all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the

engine or other components does not occur.

lWater entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.

lWater entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift

quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ulti-

mately damage.

lWater can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and pre-

mature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and

transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.

nWhen you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check

the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive

slowly and avoid deep water.

nInspection after off-road driving

lSand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake

discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system compo-

nents.

lAlways perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driv-

ing that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For

scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

256

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) − (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will

be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150)

= 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Take notice of the following information about storage precau-

tions, cargo capacity and load.

lStow cargo and luggage in the rear deck whenever possible.

lBe sure all items are secured in place.

lBe careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-

ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

lFor better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

257

2-5. Driving information

When driving

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how

this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your

vehicle.

Example on your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in

your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of B lb. (kg), the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as

follows:

B lb. (kg) − A lb. (kg) = C lb. (kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D

lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E

lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) − D lb. (kg) = E lb. (kg)

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants

increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount

that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In

other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an

excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus

cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on

your vehicle.

258

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

nThings that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compart-

ment.

lReceptacles containing gasoline

lAerosol cans

nStorage precautions

lDo not stack anything behind the front seats higher than the seat-

backs.

Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the

vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

lDo not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the

item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the

pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit

the driver or passengers, causing an accident.

• Driver’s feet

• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• Instrument panel

• Dashboard

• Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid

lSecure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and

injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-

dent.

lNever allow anyone to ride in the rear deck. It is not designed for pas-

sengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly

fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or seri-

ous bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or

an accident.

nCapacity and distribution

lDo not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle

weight rating.

lEven if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less

than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper

loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which

may cause death or serious injury.

259

2-5. Driving information

When driving

Vehicle load limits

nTotal load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information

label. (→P. 554)

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,

TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.

nTotal load capacity: (→P. 648)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants,

cargo and luggage.

nSeating capacity:

Regular Cab models

With front separated type seats—

2 occupants

With front bench type seat—

3 occupants

Double Cab and CrewMax models

With front separated type seats—

5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

With front bench type seat—

6 occupants (Front 3, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants

whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity,

do not exceed the total load capacity.

nTWR (Trailer Weight Rating): (→P. 270, 651)

TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

nCargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the

weight and the number of occupants.

260

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

nOverloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and

braking ability, resulting in an accident.

261

2-5. Driving information

When driving

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving

the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-

ate to the prevailing weather conditions.

nPre-winter preparations

lUse fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-

peratures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

lHave a service technician inspect the level and specific grav-

ity of battery electrolyte.

lHave the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set

of tire chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains

match the size of the tires.

nBefore driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions.

lDo not try to forcibly open a window, scrape an outside rear

view mirror surface or move a wiper or outside rear view mir-

ror that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to

melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it

from freezing.

lTo ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,

remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents

in front of the windshield.

lRemove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.

lPeriodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow

that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the

brakes.

262

2-5. Driving information

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain

0.2 in. (5 mm) in diameter

Cross chain

0.25 in. (6.3 mm) in diameter

nWhen driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suit-

able to road conditions.

nWhen parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the

parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it

from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent

inadvertent sliding or creeping.

nRefueling (Flex-fuel vehicles)

Observe the following precautions when switching fuels, in order

to maintain starting and driving performance.

lDo not change fuels when the fuel level is 1/4 or less.

lAlways add at least 2.6 gal. (10 L) of fuel.

lAfter fulling up with fuel, warm up the engine or drive the vehi-

cle for at least 5 minutes or 7 miles (11 km).

lDo not accelerate rapidly immediately after refueling.

263

2-5. Driving information

When driving

Regulations on the use of snow chains

lRegulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca-

tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before install-

ing chains.

lInstall the chains on the rear tires.

lRetighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).

nSnow chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

lInstall and remove tire chains in a safe location.

lInstall tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on the

front tires.

lInstall tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying

instructions.

CAUTION

nDriving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or

serious injury.

lUse tires of the size specified for your vehicle.

lMaintain the recommended level of air pressure.

lDo not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h) regardless of the type of

snow tires being used.

lSnow tires should be installed on all wheels.

l4WD models:

Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.

264

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

nDriving with snow chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,

and may cause death or serious injury.

lDo not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being

used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

lAvoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

lAvoid sudden turns and braking.

lSlow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-

trol is maintained.

NOTICE

nRepairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota deal-

ers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the

operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

nFitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function cor-

rectly when tire chains are fitted.

265

2-5. Driving information

When driving

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling,

performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your

safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle

or trailer. You must also ensure that you are using appropriate tow-

ing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed cor-

rectly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving

habits.

Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by

trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the

hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in

accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating condi-

tions.

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by

towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional

requirements such as a towing kits, etc.

266

2-5. Driving information

Towing related terms

nGCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

combination weight. The gross

combination weight is the sum of

the total vehicle weight (including

the occupants, cargo and any

optional equipment installed on

the vehicle) and the weight of the

trailer being towed (including the

cargo in the trailer).

nGVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

vehicle weight. The gross vehicle

weight is the total weight of the

vehicle. When towing a trailer, it

is the sum of the vehicle weight

(including the occupants, cargo

and any optional equipment

installed on the vehicle) and the

tongue weight.

267

2-5. Driving information

When driving

nGAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

axle weight. The gross axle

weight is the load placed on

each axle (front and rear).

nTWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross

trailer weight. The gross trailer

weight is the sum of the trailer

weight and the weight of the

cargo in the trailer.

TWR is calculated assuming

base vehicle with one driver, one

front passenger, towing package

(if available), hitch and hitch sys-

tems (if required).

Additional optional equipment,

passengers and cargo in the vehi-

cle will reduce the trailer weight

rating so as not to exceed

GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.

Front GAWR

Rear GAWR

(With brakes)

268

2-5. Driving information

nUnbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)

The trailer weight rating for tow-

ing a trailer without a trailer ser-

vice brake system.

nTongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer

hitch ball. (→P. 275)

nKingpin Weight

The load placed on the 5th wheel

mount or the gooseneck ball.

(→P. 275)

(Without brakes)

269

2-5. Driving information

When driving

Weight limits

lThe gross trailer weight must never exceed the TWR described in

the table. (→P. 270, 651)

lThe gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR

described in the table. (→P. 270)

lThe gross vehicle weight must

never exceed the GVWR indi-

cated on the Certification

Label.

lThe gross axle weight on each

axle must never exceed the

GAWR indicated on the Certi-

fication Label.

lIf the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service

brakes are required.

lIf the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control

device with sufficient capacity is required.

lIf the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight dis-

tributing hitch with sufficient capacity is required.

270

2-5. Driving information

Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross

vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the

limits.

nGCWR* and TWR*

Regular Cab models

*: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE

International per SAE J2807.

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system

Bed

type GCWR TWR

GSK50L-TRADKA 4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard 10000 lb.

(4535 kg)

4900 lb.

(2220 kg)

GSK51L-THADKA Long 4800 lb.

(2175 kg)

UPK50L-TRTDKA

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

12500 lb.

(5670 kg)*2

7100 lb.

(3220 kg)*2

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*3

8600 lb.

(3900 kg)*3

USK51L-THTDKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

Long

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

8400 lb.

(3810 kg)*2

16000 lb.

(7255 kg)*3

10400 lb.

(4715 kg)*3

USK55L-TRTDKA

4WD

Standard

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

8200 lb.

(3715 kg)*2

15500 lb.

(7030 kg)*3

9700 lb.

(4395 kg)*3

15000 lb.

(6800 kg)*3,4

9200 lb.

(4170 kg)*3,4

USK56L-THTDKA Long

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

8100 lb.

(3670 kg)*2

16000 lb.

(7255 kg)*3

10100 lb.

(4580 kg)*3

271

2-5. Driving information

When driving

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

*2: Without towing package

*3: With towing package

*4: P275/55R20 tires

Double Cab models

USK55L-TRTDGA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD

Standard

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

8200 lb.

(3715 kg)*2

15500 lb.

(7030 kg)*3

9700 lb.

(4395 kg)*3

15000 lb.

(6800 kg)*3,4

9200 lb.

(4170 kg)*3,4

USK56L-THTDGA Long

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

8100 lb.

(3670 kg)*2

16000 lb.

(7255 kg)*3

10100 lb.

(4580 kg)*3

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system

Bed

type GCWR TWR

GSK51L-CRASKA

4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

10000 lb.

(4535 kg)

4500 lb.

(2040 kg)

UPK51L-CRTSKA

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

12500 lb.

(5670 kg)*2

6700 lb.

(3035 kg)*2

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*3

8200 lb.

(3715 kg)*3

UPK56L-CRTSKA 4WD

12500 lb.

(5670 kg)*2

6400 lb.

(2900 kg)*2

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*3

7900 lb.

(3580 kg)*3

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system

Bed

type GCWR TWR

272

2-5. Driving information

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

*2: Without towing package

*3: With towing package

USK51L-CRTSKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

8100 lb.

(3670 kg)*2

16000 lb.

(7255 kg)*3

10100 lb.

(4580 kg)*3

USK51L-CRTLKA

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

8100 lb.

(3670 kg)*2

15900 lb.

(7210 kg)*3

10000 lb.

(4535 kg)*3

USK52L-CHTSKA Long 16000 lb.

(7255 kg)

10000 lb.

(4535 kg)

USK56L-CRTSKA

4WD

Standard

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

7800 lb.

(3535 kg)*2

16000 lb.

(7255 kg)*3

9700 lb.

(4395 kg)*3

USK56L-CRTLKA

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

7800 lb.

(3535 kg)*2

16000 lb.

(7255 kg)*3

9800 lb.

(4445 kg)*3

USK57L-CHTSKA Long 16000 lb.

(7255 kg)

9800 lb.

(4445 kg)

USK56L-CRTSGA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD

Standard

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

7800 lb.

(3535 kg)*2

16000 lb.

(7255 kg)*3

9700 lb.

(4395 kg)*3

USK56L-CRTLGA

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

7800 lb.

(3535 kg)*2

16000 lb.

(7255 kg)*3

9800 lb.

(4445 kg)*3

USK57L-CHTSGA Long 16000 lb.

(7255 kg)

9800 lb.

(4445 kg)

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system

Bed

type GCWR TWR

273

2-5. Driving information

When driving

CrewMax models

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system

Bed

type GCWR TWR

UPK51L-PSTSKA

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Short

12500 lb.

(5670 kg)*2

6600 lb.

(2990 kg)*2

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*3

8100 lb.

(3670 kg)*3

UPK56L-PSTSKA 4WD

12500 lb.

(5670 kg)*2

6200 lb.

(2810 kg)*2

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*3

7700 lb.

(3490 kg)*3

USK51L-PSTSKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

8000 lb.

(3625 kg)*2

15900 lb.

(7210 kg)*3

9900 lb.

(4490 kg)*3

USK51L-PSTLKA

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

7900 lb.

(3580 kg)*2

15400 lb.

(6985 kg)*3

9300 lb.

(4215 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTSKA

4WD

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

7700 lb.

(3490 kg)*2

15300 lb.

(6940 kg)*3

9000 lb.

(4080 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTLKA

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

7700 lb.

(3490 kg)*2

15300 lb.

(6940 kg)*3

9000 lb.

(4080 kg)*3

274

2-5. Driving information

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

*2: Without towing package

*3: With towing package

nUnbraked TWR*

1000 lb. (453 kg)

USK56L-PSTSGA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD Short

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

7700 lb.

(3490 kg)*2

15300 lb.

(6940 kg)*3

9000 lb.

(4080 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTLGA

14000 lb.

(6350 kg)*2

7700 lb.

(3490 kg)*2

15300 lb.

(6940 kg)*3

9000 lb.

(4080 kg)*3

*: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE

International per SAE J2807.

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system

Bed

type GCWR TWR

275

2-5. Driving information

When driving

Trailer Tongue Weight and Trailer Kingpin Weight

lA recommended tongue weight or kingpin weight varies in accor-

dance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.

lTo ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must

be loaded by referring to the following instructions.

1. Conventional Towing

The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue

weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue Weight/Gross trailer weight x 100

= 9% to 11%)

Gross trailer weight

Tongue Weight

If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front

axle to the same weight as before the trailer connection.

If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the

front fender height above the front axle before connection.

Adjust weight distributing hitch torque until front fender is

returned to the same height as before connection.

Do not reduce front fender height below original measurement.

The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight

can be measured with platform scales found at a highway

weighing station, building supply company, trucking company,

junk yard, etc.

276

2-5. Driving information

2. Fifth wheel Towing or Gooseneck Towing

The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the kingpin

weight is 19% to 21%. (Kingpin weight/Gross trailer weight x 100

= 15% to 21%)

Gross trailer weight

Kingpin weight

The gross trailer weight and kingpin weight can be measured

with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, build-

ing supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

CrewMax models: Current fifth wheel trailer designs are not

compatible with short bed.

277

2-5. Driving information

When driving

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota rec-

ommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

lIf you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.

lUse only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight require-

ment of your vehicle.

lFollow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.

lLubricate the hitch ball and kingpin with a light coating of grease.

lRemove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer.

After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle

body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

Bumper towing (vehicles with steel bumper only)

The rear bumper of your vehicle

is equipped with a hole to install

a trailer ball. If you have any

questions, contact your Toyota

dealer.

The gross trailer weight (trailer

weight plus cargo weight) when

towing with the bumper must

never exceed the TWR (→P. 270,

651) or 5000 lb. (2268 kg).

278

2-5. Driving information

Selecting trailer ball

Use the correct trailer ball for your application.

Trailer ball load rating

Matches or exceeds the gross

trailer weight rating of the trailer.

Ball diameter

Matches the size of the trailer

coupler. Most couplers are

stamped with the required trailer

ball size.

Shank length

Protrudes beyond the bottom of

the lock washer and nut by at

least 2 threads.

Shank diameter

Matches the ball mount hole

diameter size.

Trailer

class

Typical trailer ball

size

2 5/16 in.

II and III

2 in.

1 7/8 in.

279

2-5. Driving information

When driving

Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball

Hitch receiver pin hole posi-

tion: 46.4 in. (1179 mm)

Connecting trailer lights

Use the wire harness stored in the rear end under the vehicle body.

4 pin connector

4 pin, 7 pin connectors (if equipped)

280

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing tips

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid

an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when

towing:

lSpeed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not

exceed the posted towing speed limit.

lToyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph

(104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the

posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set

forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability

of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as

speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of con-

trol.

lBefore starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-

trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.

nService connector for towing brake controller (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a service

connector for the trailer brake controller

as shown.

Access the service connector.

Remove the scuff plate.

Remove the clip (screw type) and trim

board.

Remove the connector cover.

281

2-5. Driving information

When driving

lPractice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in

an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel

of the vehicle-trailer combination.

lReversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.

Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the

left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to

move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing

without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have

someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an acci-

dent.

lAs stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-

vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h)

of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.

lAvoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jack-

knifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet

or slippery surfaces.

lAvoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

lAvoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before mak-

ing a turn.

lNote that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than

the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making

a wider than normal turning radius.

lSlow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery

surfaces, etc.

Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.

lTake care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires consider-

able distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of

your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing

lanes.

282

2-5. Driving information

lTo maintain engine braking efficiency when driving on a long steep

downgrade, do not use the transmission in D.

Transmission shift range position must be in 5 in the S mode (6-

speed models) or in 4 in the S mode (5-speed models).

lInstability happens more frequently when descending steep or long

downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do

not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long down-

hill grades.

lAvoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the

brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and

result in reduced braking efficiency.

lDue to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may

overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when

driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air condition-

ing (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.

(→P. 637)

lAlways place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the

trailer’s wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and

put the transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoid-

able, do so only after performing the following:

Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s

and trailer’s wheels.

When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly

until the blocks absorb the load.

Apply the parking brake firmly.

Shift into P and turn off the engine.

283

2-5. Driving information

When driving

lWhen restarting after parking on a slope:

With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep

the brake pedal pressed.

Shift into D or R (if reversing).

Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or

back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.

Have someone retrieve the blocks.

nMatching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height

nBefore towing

Check that the following conditions are met:

lEnsure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (→P. 665)

lTrailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recom-

mendation.

lAll trailer lights work as required by law.

lAll lights work each time you connect them.

lThe trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

No matter which class of tow hitch

applies, for a more safe trailer hookup,

the trailer ball setup must be the proper

height for the coupler on the trailer.

Coupler

Trailer ball

284

2-5. Driving information

lThe vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched.

Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue

weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

lThe trailer cargo is securely loaded.

lThe rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or

local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for

towing purposes.

lDepress TOW/HAUL button (if equipped)

nBreak-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components

(such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota rec-

ommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for

over 500 miles (800 km).

After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start

towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a

speed of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full

throttle acceleration.

nMaintenance

lIf you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance

due to the additional load. (See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet”

or “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”/“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

lRetighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approxi-

mately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

nIf trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can

adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.

lIf trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to

reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle

and trailer should stabilize. (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to

stabilize the vehicle and trailer.)

285

2-5. Driving information

When driving

lAfter the trailer swaying has stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.

• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.

• Check the load in the trailer.

Make sure the load has not shifted.

Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.

• Check the load in the vehicle.

Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.

If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred

is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.

Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the

towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.

CAUTION

nTrailer towing precautions

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance

with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so

could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability

and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and

performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing

a trailer.

nTo avoid accident or injury

lDo not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.

lIf the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device

with sufficient capacity is required.

lIf the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing

hitch with sufficient capacity is required.

lAdjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads

as close to the trailer axle as possible.

lDo not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the

speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual,

whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross

winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you

experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow

down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of

which you experience the instability.

286

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

nTo avoid accident or injury

lDo not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.

lDo not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing

and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery sur-

faces.

lDo not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight,

gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.

lDo not use cruise control when you are towing.

lSlow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill

grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long

downhill grades.

lVehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before

descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do

not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill

grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the

brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result

in reduced braking efficiency.

nHitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the

hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of

towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight

rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum

weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight

rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in

death or serious personal injuries.

287

2-5. Driving information

When driving

CAUTION

nWhen towing a trailer

Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable fed-

eral and state/provincial regulations.

lIf the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are

required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all appli-

cable federal and state/provincial regulations.

lNever tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehi-

cle’s braking effectiveness.

lNever tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both

the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch

ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

NOTICE

nWhen installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the

trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

nDo not directly splice trailer lights

Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage

your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.

nWhen towing a fifth wheel trailer

Be careful not to hit the cabin or bed with

the trailer while making a sharp turn.

288

2-5. Driving information

Dinghy towing

NOTICE

nTo avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on

the ground) behind a motor home.

289

2-5. Driving information

When driving

292

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system∗

∗: If equipped

Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tem-

perature setting.

Control panel

Fan speed

control dial

Outside air or

recirculated air mode

Front passenger’s

side temperature

control dial

Air conditioning ON/OFF switch

Simultaneous mode

Air outlet

selection dial

Driver’s side temperature

control dial

Automatic mode

Windshield defogger

Fan OFF switch

293

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

Using the automatic mode

Press .

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan

speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-

ting.

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or coun-

terclockwise (cool).

The temperature for the driver and front passenger seats can be set

separately.

Display

Front passenger’s side

temperature setting display

Fan speed display Airflow display

Driver’s side temperature

setting display

294

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the settings

nAdjusting the temperature setting

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-

clockwise (cool).

The air conditioning system switches between individual and

simultaneous modes each time is pressed.

lIndividual mode (the indicator on is on)

The temperature for the driver and front passenger seats can be

adjusted separately.

lSimultaneous mode (the indicator on is off)

The driver’s side temperature control dial can be used to adjust

the temperature for driver and front passenger seats.

nAdjusting the fan speed

Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counter-

clockwise (decrease).

The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)

Press to turn the fan off.

295

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

nChanging the air outlets

Turn the air outlet selection dial.

The air outlets switch each time

either side of air outlet selection

dial is turned.

Air flow as shown according to the mode selected.

When the dial is set to , air

flows to the upper body.

*: CrewMax models only

When the dial is set to , air

flows to the upper body and feet.

*1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only

*2: CrewMax models only

296

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

When the dial is set to , air

flows to the feet.

*1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only

*2: CrewMax models only

When the dial is set to , air

flows to the feet and the wind-

shield defogger operates.

*1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only

*2: CrewMax models only

nSwitching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between (outside air mode) and

(recirculated air mode) each time the switch is pressed.

297

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The indicator comes on.

The air conditioning system con-

trol operates automatically.

Recirculated air mode will auto-

matically switch to outside air

mode.

Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets

Driver side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

298

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front passenger side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

Rear outlets (CrewMax models only)

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

299

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

nUsing the automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature set-

ting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.

lImmediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until

warm or cool air is ready to flow.

lCool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is

on.

nUsing the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for

an extended period.

nSwitching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to

in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.

nWindow defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode

in situations where the windows need to be defogged.

nWhen outside temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)

The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.

nWhen the indicator on flashes

Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on

once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indi-

cator continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

nAir conditioning odors

lDuring use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause

odor to be emitted from the vents.

lTo reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

300

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time

immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic

mode.

CAUTION

nTo prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The

difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind-

shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your

vision.

NOTICE

nTo prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

301

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

Manual air conditioning system∗

Adjusting the settings

nAdjusting the temperature setting

Driver’s side temperature control dial

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-

clockwise (cool).

If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air

or heated air.

For quick cooling, turn the temperature control dial to the MAX A/C

position.

The air conditioning will automatically turn on and the air intake selector

will be set to recirculated air mode.

∗: If equipped

Outside air or recirculated

air mode

Air outlet selection dial

Air conditioning ON/OFF switch

Driver’s side temperature

control dial

Fan speed control dial

Front passenger’s

side temperature

control dial

302

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front passenger’s side temperature control dial

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-

clockwise (cool).

lIndividual mode

When the front passenger’s side temperature control dial in a posi-

tion other than the SYNC position, the temperature for the driver and

front passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

lSimultaneous mode

When the front passenger’s side temperature control dial in SYNC

position, turn the driver’s side temperature control dial can be used

to adjust the temperature for driver and front passenger seats.

nAdjusting the fan speed

Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counter-

clockwise (decrease).

Set the dial to OFF to turn the fan off.

nChanging the air outlets

Turn the air outlet selection dial.

The air outlets switch each time

either side of air outlet selection

dial is turned.

303

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

Air flow as shown according to the mode selected.

When the dial is set to , air

flows to the upper body.

*: CrewMax models only

When the dial is set to , air

flows to the upper body and feet.

*1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only

*2: CrewMax models only

When the dial is set to , air

flows to the feet.

*1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only

*2: CrewMax models only

*2*1

304

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

When the dial is set to , air

flows to the feet and the wind-

shield defogger operates.

The air intake selector is automat-

ically set to outside air mode. To

return the recirculated air mode,

press .

*1: Double Cab and CrewMax models only

*2: CrewMax models only

When the dial is set to , air

flows to the windshield and side

windows.

The air intake selector is automat-

ically set to outside air mode.

In this position, the air intake

selector cannot be changed to the

recirculated air mode, press

nSwitching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between (outside air mode) and

(recirculated air mode) each time the switch is pressed.

305

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

nIf the ambient temperature drops while using the recirculated

air mode

The air intake mode automatically changes from recirculated air

mode to outside air mode after a few minutes.

To cancel this function:

Press and hold for longer than 2 seconds.

To reactivate this function:

Turn the engine switch to the LOCK or ACC position.

Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets

Driver side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

306

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front passenger side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

Rear outlets (CrewMax models only)

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

307

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

nFor quick clearing of the windshield and side windows

Press to turn the air conditioning on.

nUsing the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for

an extended period.

nWhen outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)

The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.

nWhen is selected for the air outlets used

For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flow-

ing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature control

dial.

nWhen the indicator on flashes

Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on

once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indi-

cator continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it

inspected by your Toyota dealer.

nAir conditioning odors

lDuring use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause

odor to be emitted from the vents.

lTo reduce potential odors from occurring:

It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

308

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

CAUTION

nTo prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in

extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the

outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the

windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE

nTo prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

309

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

Outside rear view mirror defoggers and front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped on Regular Cab and Double Cab models)

Clear the outside rear view mirrors using the defogger.

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system

On/off

Press the button to turn on the

outside rear view mirror defog-

gers. The indicator will come

on. The defoggers will auto-

matically turn off after about

15 minutes. Pressing the but-

ton again also turns the defog-

gers off.

310

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

nThe defogger can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

nThe front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

Turning the outside rear view mirror defoggers on will turn the front wind-

shield wiper de-icer on.

CAUTION

nOutside rear view mirror defoggers

The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch

them to prevent from burning yourself.

nWhen the front windshield wiper de-icer is on (if equipped)

Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the

front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system

On/off

Press the button to turn on the

outside rear view mirror defog-

gers. The indicator will come

on. The defoggers will auto-

matically turn off after about

15 minutes. Pressing the but-

ton again also turns the defog-

gers off.

311

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

Back window, outside rear view mirror defoggers and front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped on CrewMax models)

Clear the back window using the defogger.

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system

On/off

Press the button to turn on the

back window defogger. The

indicator will come on. The

defoggers will automatically

turn off after about 15 minutes.

Pressing the button again also

turns the defogger off.

312

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

nThe defogger can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

nOutside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)

Turning the back window defogger on will turn outside rear view mirror

defoggers on.

nThe front windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

Turning the back window defogger on will turn the front windshield wiper de-

icer on.

Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system

On/off

Press the button to turn on the

back window defogger. The

indicator will come on. The

defoggers will automatically

turn off after about 15 minutes.

Pressing the button again also

turns the defogger off.

313

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior and exterior features

CAUTION

nBack window defogger

The surface of the back window becomes hot. Do not touch it to prevent

from burning yourself.

nOutside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)

The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch

them to prevent from burning yourself.

nWhen the front windshield wiper de-icer is on (if equipped)

Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the

front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

314

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types

With navigation system

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer

to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Without navigation system

Type A: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio

Type B: CD player with changer and AM/FM radio

315

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Type C: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio

Title Page

Using the radio P. 318

Using the CD player P. 326

Playing MP3 and WMA discs P. 335

Operating an iPod P. 343

Operating a USB memory P. 349

Optimal use of the audio system P. 356

Using the AUX port P. 360

Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 362

316

3-2. Using the audio system

Language settings (type B and C)

The language used for all voice guidance, voice recognition and mes-

sages may be changed.

Press .

Press that corresponds to “MORE”.

Press that corresponds to “LANG”.

Press that corresponds to the desired language.

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

“ENG” (English) or “ESP” (Spanish)

For vehicles sold in Canada

“ENG” (English) or “FRAN” (French)

nUsing cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular

phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is

operating.

317

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

CAUTION

nFor vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada

lPart 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the

user’s authority to operate this device.

lLaser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.

This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information

from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so

that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disas-

semble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to

laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other

than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo-

sure.

NOTICE

nTo prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.

nTo avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

318

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the radio

Type A

Type B and C

Volume

Scanning for

receivable stations

Station selector

Seeking the

frequency

Adjusting the

frequency (AM, FM

mode) or channel

(SAT mode)

AM⋅SAT/FM

mode buttons

Power

Displaying

radio text

messages

Changing

the channel

AM/FM/SAT

mode button

Station selector

Seeking the

frequency

Adjusting the frequency

(AM, FM mode) or

channel (SAT mode)

Displaying radio

text messages

Changing

the channel

Scanning for

receivable stations

VolumePower

Silencing

a sound

Selecting the

preset station pages

319

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)

Search for desired stations by turning or or

pressing “∨” or “∧” on .

Press and hold a button (from to or one of )

until you hear a beep.

Type B and C:

Each time is pressed, station pages are changed. There are a

total of 6 pages.

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)

nScanning the preset radio stations

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press again.

nScanning all radio stations within range

Press .

All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press again.

320

3-2. Using the audio system

nDisplaying radio text messages (for type B and C, FM mode

only)

When a new radio text message is received, “MSG” is shown on

the display. To display the message, press .

If the text continues past the end of the display, “ ” is displayed. Press

and hold until you hear a beep.

Text messages are not displayed while driving.

XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)

nReceiving XM® Satellite Radio

Press or .

The display changes as follows each time or is

pressed.

Type A

AM → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3

Type B and C

AM → FM → SAT

Turn or to select the desired channel in all the

categories or press “∨” or “∧” on to select the desired

channel in the current category.

321

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

nSetting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets

Select the desired channel. Press and hold a button (from to

or one of ) until you hear a beep.

Type B and C:

Each time is pressed, station pages are changed. There are a

total of 6 pages.

nChanging the channel category

Press “∧” or “∨” on .

nScanning XM® Satellite Radio channels

lScanning channels in the current category

Press .

When the desired channel is reached, press again.

lScanning the preset channels

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

When the desired channel is reached, press again.

322

3-2. Using the audio system

nDisplaying text information

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Type A

Channel name → Title (song/program title) → Name (artist name/feature)

→ Channel number.

Type B and C

Title (song/program title) → Title (song/program title)/Name (artist name/

feature).

323

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

nWhen the battery is disconnected

All preset stations are erased. (type A only)

nReception sensitivity

lObjects, especially metal objects, such as cargo, a camper, or a truck

rack, may adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.

lMaintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con-

tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength

and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

nXM® Satellite Radio

An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts

provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 con-

tiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.

lXM® subscriptions

For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:

U.S.A. ⎯

Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.

Canada ⎯

Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

lRadio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a

problem. Select “CH000” using or , and the receiver’s

8-character ID number will appear.

lSatellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accom-

panying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.

324

3-2. Using the audio system

nIf XM® Satellite Radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the dis-

play. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested

corrective action.

ANTENNA

CHECK

ANTENNA

The XM® antenna is not connected. Check

whether the XM® antenna cable is attached

securely.

There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the sur-

rounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified

dealer.

UPDATING

You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio.

The radio is being updated with the latest encryp-

tion code. Contact XM® Satellite Radio for sub-

scription information. When a contract is canceled,

you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air

channels.

The premium channel you selected is not autho-

rized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio

returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it

does not change automatically, select another

channel. If you want to listen to the premium chan-

nel, contact XM® Satellite Radio.

NO SIGNAL

The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.

Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a

stronger signal.

LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information.

Wait until the unit has received the information.

OFF AIR

CHANNEL OFF

AIR

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any

programming. Select another channel.

-----

There is no song/program title or artist name/fea-

ture associated with the channel at this time. No

action needed.

325

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-

438-9677 (Canada)

nCertifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. How-

ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of

the following:

lReorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.

lIncreasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.

lConnecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

lConsulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases

lThe antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.

lA cover will be put on the vehicle.

---

The channel you selected is no longer available.

Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to

the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not

change automatically, select another channel.

326

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the CD player

Type A

Type B and C

Random playback

Repeat play

Playback

CD eject

Displaying text

messages

Selecting

a track

Fast-forward

Reverse

Searching playback

VolumePower

CD eject

Fast-forwarding

and reversing/

Selecting a track Searching

playback

CD load

(type B only)

Playback/pause

Displaying text

messages

Selector buttons

Playback

VolumePower

Selecting a

track

327

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Loading CDs

nLoading a CD (type A and C)

Insert a CD.

nLoading a CD (type B)

Press .

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,

insert a CD.

nLoading multiple CDs (type B only)

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,

insert a CD.

The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green

again, insert the next CD.

Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.

To cancel, press . If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds,

loading will be canceled automatically.

328

3-2. Using the audio system

Ejecting CDs

nEjecting a CD (type A and C)

Press and remove the CD.

nEjecting a CD (type B)

To select the CD to be ejected, press that corre-

sponds to “ ” or “ ”.

The selected CD number is shown on the display.

Press and remove the CD.

nEjecting all the CDs (type B only)

Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the

CDs.

Selecting a track

Turn or or press “∨” or “∧” on to select the

desired track.

Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks

Type A

Press or .

Type B and C

Press and hold “∨” or “∧” on .

329

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Scanning tracks

Press .

The first ten seconds of each track will be played.

To cancel, press again.

Press again when the desired track is reached.

Selecting a CD (type B only)

nSelecting a CD to play

Press that corresponds to “ ” or “ ”.

nScanning loaded CDs

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.

To cancel, press again.

Press again when the desired CD is reached.

Playing and pausing tracks (type B and C)

Press .

330

3-2. Using the audio system

Random playback

nCurrent CD

Press or that corresponds to “RDM”.

Songs are played in random order.

To cancel, press the button again.

nAll CDs (type B only)

Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.

Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.

To cancel, press the button again.

Repeat play

nRepeating a track

Press or that corresponds to “RPT”.

To cancel, press the button again.

nRepeating all of the tracks on a CD (type B only)

Press that corresponds to “RPT” twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

331

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Type A

Track no./Elapsed time → CD title → Track name.

Type B and C

Track title → Track name/Artist name → Track name/Elapsed time.

nDisplay (type A only)

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding for 1 second

or more will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for 6

seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed

properly or may not be displayed at all.

332

3-2. Using the audio system

nError messages

“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the

player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side

down.

“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high tempera-

ture inside the player. Wait for a while and then

press or . Contact your Toyota

dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.

nDiscs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on the recording format or disc

features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not be used.

nCD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when

a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.

nIf CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for

extended periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

nLens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

333

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

NOTICE

nCDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual

Discs.

Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

lCD player with changer and AM/FM

radio: CDs that have a diameter that is

not 4.7 in. (12 cm)

lLow-quality and deformed CDs

lCDs with a transparent or translucent

recording area

lCDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-

R labels attached to them, or that have

had the label peeled off

334

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE

nCD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the

CDs or the player itself.

lDo not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.

lDo not apply oil to the CD player.

lStore CDs away from direct sunlight.

lNever try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

lDo not insert more than one CD at a

time.

335

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Playing MP3 and WMA discs

Type A

Type B and C

Random playback

Playback

CD eject

Displaying text

messages

Selecting

a file

Repeat play

Searching playback

Selecting

a folder

Reversing

Fast-forwarding

VolumePower

CD eject

Searching playback

Selecting a

folder

CD load

(type B only)

Playback/pause

Displaying text messages

Selecting a file

Selector buttons

Fast-forwarding

and reversing/

Selecting a file

Playback

VolumePower

336

3-2. Using the audio system

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs

→P. 3 2 7

Selecting MP3 and WMA discs (type B only)

→P. 3 2 9

Selecting and scanning a folder

nSelecting folders one at a time

Press “∨” or “∧” on to select the desired folder.

nScanning the first file of all the folders

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.

When the desired folder is reached, press again.

nReturning to the first folder

Press and hold “∨” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting and scanning files

nSelecting one file at a time

Turn or or press “∨” or “∧” on to select the

desired file.

337

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

nSelecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder

Press .

When the desired file is reached, press once again.

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

Type A

Press or .

Type B and C

Press and hold “∨” or “∧” on .

Playing and pausing files (type B and C)

Press .

Random playback

nPlaying files from a particular folder in random order

Press or that corresponds to “RDM”.

To cancel, press the button again.

nPlaying all of the files on a disc in random order (type B only)

Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

338

3-2. Using the audio system

Repeat play

nRepeating a file

Press or that corresponds to “RPT”.

To cancel, press the button again.

nRepeating all of the files in a folder

Type A

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

To cancel, press the button again.

Type B and C

Press that corresponds to “RPT” twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

nRepeating all of the files in a disc (type B only)

Press that corresponds to “RPT” three times.

To cancel, press the button again.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Type A

Folder no./File no./Elapsed time → Folder name → File name → Album

title (MP3 only) → Track title → Artist name.

Type B and C

Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track

title/Elapsed time.

339

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

nDisplay

→P. 331

nError messages

“CD CHECK”:This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the

player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side

down.

“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”:Operation has stopped due to a high tempera-

ture inside the player. Wait for a while and then

press or . Contact your Toyota

dealer if the CD still cannot be played.

nDiscs that can be used

→P. 332

nCD player protection feature

→P. 332

nIf CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for

extended periods

→P. 332

nLens cleaners

→P. 332

340

3-2. Using the audio system

nMP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) is a Microsoft® audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats

recorded by them that can be used.

lMP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and

monaural

lWMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

341

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

lCompatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-

RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status

of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may

jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

lCompatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above

may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not

be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

lFile names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

lMulti-sessions

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play

discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can

be played.

lID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title and artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

342

3-2. Using the audio system

lMP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc

are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file

is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you

do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-

essary folders.

If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,

only music data can be played.

lExtensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage

to the speakers.

lPlayback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit

rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,

depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the

encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of

playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at

all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may

take more time to recognize the disc. In some cases, playback may not

be possible at all.

•Microsoft

®, Windows®, and Windows Media® are the registered trade-

marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

NOTICE

nCDs and adapters that cannot be used (→P. 333)

nCD player precautions (→P. 334)

343

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Operating an iPod∗

∗: If equipped

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle

speakers.

nConnecting an iPod

Open the cover and connect

an iPod using an iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if

it is not turned on.

Press .

nControl panel

Playback/pause

Displaying text messagesSelector knob

Selector buttons

Fast-forwarding

and reversing/

Selecting a song

Playback

VolumePower

344

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a play mode

Press that corresponds to “BROWSE” to select iPod

menu mode.

Press that corresponds to the desired play mode.

nPlay mode list

Depending on the model, the name of your iPod may be displayed at

the top of the list.

Play mode First

selection

Second

selection

Third

selection

Fourth

selection

PLIST Playlist

select

Songs

select --

ARTIST Artist select Albums

select

Songs

select -

ALBUM Albums

select

Songs

select --

GENRE Genre select Artists select Albums

select

Songs

select

SONGS Songs

select ---

PODCST Albums

select

Songs

select --

COMPSR Composers

select

Albums

select

Songs

select -

BOOK Songs

select ---

345

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

nSelecting a list

Turn to display the first selection list.

Press to select the desired item.

Pressing that corresponds to “MORE” changes to the second

selection list.

Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.

To return to the previous selection list, press that corresponds

to “ ”.

Selecting songs from a song list

Press that corresponds to “LIST”.

The current playlist is displayed.

Turning to select the desired song.

Press returns the screen from list display to the previous

screen.

346

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting songs

Turn or press “∨” or “∧” on to select the desired

song.

Playing and pausing songs

Press .

Fast-forwarding and reversing songs

Press and hold “∨” or “∧” on .

Shuffle playback

nPlaying songs from one playlist or album in random order

Press that corresponds to “RDM”.

To cancel, press the button twice.

nPlaying songs from all the playlists or albums in random order

Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

Repeat play

Press that corresponds to “RPT”.

To cancel, press the button again.

Even when the repeat play option has not been selected, playback will

automatically continue from the first song in the current play list once the

last song has ended.

347

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track

title/Elapsed time

nAbout iPod

lApple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance

with safety and regulatory standards.

liPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-

tries.

niPod functions

lWhen an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod

mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point at which it was last

used.

lDepending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions

may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once

again may resolve some malfunctions.

niPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect

your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.

For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-

ual.

nError messages

“IPOD ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod, inside the USB box or

the connection between them.

“NO SONGS”:This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

“UPDATE YOUR IPOD”:This indicates that the version of the iPod is not

compatible.

348

3-2. Using the audio system

nCompatible models

Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some

models listed above might be incompatible with this system.

iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.

iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this

system.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

lMaximum number of lists in device: 9999

lMaximum number of songs in device: 65,025

lMaximum number of songs per list: 65,025

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to iPod

lDo not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may

become high, resulting in damage to the player.

lDo not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is

connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.

lDo not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or

its terminal.

Model Generation Software version

iPod 5th generation Ver. 1.2.0 or higher

iPod nano 1st generation Ver. 1.3.0 or higher

2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or higher

3rd generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher

iPod touch 1st generation Ver. 1.1.0 or higher

iPod classic 1st generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher

349

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Operating a USB memory∗

∗: If equipped

Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the

vehicle speakers.

nConnecting a USB memory

Open the cover and connect a

USB memory.

Turn on the power of the USB

memory if it is not turned on.

Press .

nControl panel

Fast-forwarding

and reversing/

Selecting a file Selecting a file

Playback/

pause

Searching playback

Displaying text messages

Selector buttons Selecting a folder

Playback

VolumePower

350

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting and scanning a folder

nSelecting a folder

Press “∨” or “∧” on to select the desired folder.

nReturning to the first file of the first folder

Press and hold “∨” on until you hear a beep.

nScanning the first file of all the folders

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.

When the desired folder is reached, press again.

Selecting and scanning files

nSelecting a file

Turn or press “∨” or “∧” on to select the desired

file.

nScanning the files in a folder

Press .

The first ten seconds of each file will be played.

To cancel, press again.

When the desired file is reached, press again.

351

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Playing and pausing files

Press .

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

Press and hold “∨” or “∧” on .

Random playback

nPlaying files from a folder in random order

Press that corresponds to “RDM”.

To cancel, press the button twice.

nPlaying all the files from a USB memory in random order

Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

Repeat play

nRepeating a file

Press that corresponds to “RPT”.

To cancel, press the button twice.

nRepeating all the files in a folder

Press that corresponds to “RPT” twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

352

3-2. Using the audio system

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track

title/Elapsed time

nUSB memory functions

Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain

functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it

once again may resolve some malfunctions.

nError messages

“USB ERROR”:This indicates a problem in the USB memory, in the USB box

or connection between them.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB

memory.

353

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

nUSB memory

lCompatible device

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.

Depending on the type of USB device, playback may not be possible.

lCompatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)

• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows®)

• Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above

may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not

be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum number of folder in device: 999 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files in device: 65,025

• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

lMP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) is a Microsoft® audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and

to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

354

3-2. Using the audio system

lMP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,

MPEG2.5)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)

MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and

monaural

lWMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)

lFile names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

lID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3

tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

lMP3 and WMA playback

When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is plugged, all files in the

USB memory device are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the

first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly,

we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files

or create any unnecessary folders.

355

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

lExtensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage

to the speakers.

lPlayback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit

rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the

encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of

playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at

all.

•Microsoft

®, Windows®, and Windows Media® are the registered trade-

marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Do not connect a USB memory or operate the controls.

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to a USB memory

lDo not leave a USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the

vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

lDo not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory

while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

lDo not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB

memory or its terminal.

356

3-2. Using the audio system

Optimal use of the audio system

Type A

Type B and C

Adjusting the sound quality and ASL

Menu button

Selector buttons

Selector knob

357

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Using the audio control function

nChanging sound quality modes

Type A

Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following

order:

“BAS”→“TRE”→“FAD”→“BAL”→“ASL”

Type B and C

Press .

Press that corresponds to the desired mode.

“BASS”, “MID” (type B only), “TREB”, “FADE”, or “BAL”

nAdjusting sound quality

Type A

Turning adjusts the level.

*:The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio

mode or CD mode.

Mode

displayed

Sound qual-

ity mode Level Turn to the

left

Turn to the

right

BAS Bass* -5 to 5 Low High

TRE Treble* -5 to 5

FAD

Front/rear

volume

balance

F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to

front

BAL

Left/right

volume

balance

L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right

358

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B and C

Turning adjusts the level.

*:The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio

mode.

nAdjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

Type A

When “ASL” is selected, turning to the right changes the

“ASL” level in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.

Turning to the left turns “ASL” off.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehi-

cle speed.

Mode

displayed

Sound qual-

ity mode Level Turn to the

left

Turn to the

right

BASS Bass* -5 to 5

Low HighMID Mid-range*

(type B only) -5 to 5

TREB Treble* -5 to 5

FADE

Front/rear

volume

balance

F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to

front

BAL

Left/right

volume

balance

L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right

359

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Type B and C

Press .

Press that corresponds to “MORE”.

Press that corresponds to “ASL”.

Press that corresponds to the desired mode.

Type B: “ON” or “OFF”

Type C: “LOW”, “MID”, “HIGH”, or “OFF”

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to

vehicle speed.

nSetting the number of preset pages (type B and C)

The number of preset pages desired can be set from 1 to 6. The initial

setting is 6 pages.

Press .

Press that corresponds to “MORE”.

Press that corresponds to “PRESET”.

Press that corresponds to the desired number of preset

pages.

nLanguage settings (type B and C)

→P. 3 1 6

360

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the AUX port∗

∗: If equipped

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen

to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.

Type A

Type B and C

Press or .

361

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

nOperating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other

adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

nWhen using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable

audio device.

362

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the steering wheel audio switches∗

∗: If equipped

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the

steering wheel.

Increases/decreases vol-

ume

Radio mode: Selects radio

station

CD mode: Selects track/file,

folder and disc

iPod mode: Selects a song

USB memory mode:

Selects a file and folder

Bluetooth® audio mode:

Selects a track and album

RSE mode: Selects track/

file and chapter

Turns the power on, selects

an audio source

363

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior and exterior features

Turning the power on

Press when the audio system is turned off.

The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you

hear a beep.

Changing the audio source

Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source

changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.

If no discs are inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped.

Type A:

FM1→FM2→CD→AUX→AM→SAT1→SAT2→SAT3

Type B:

FM→SAT→CD changer→RSE*→Bluetooth® audio→AUX→

USB/iPod→AM

Type C:

FM→SAT→CD→Bluetooth® audio→AUX→USB/iPod→AM

*: Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system

Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the

volume.

Press and hold the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the vol-

ume.

Selecting a radio station

Press to select the radio mode.

Press “∨” or “∧” on to select a radio station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “∨” or “∧” on

until you hear a beep.

364

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a track/file or song

Press to select the CD, iPod, USB memory, Bluetooth®

audio or RSE mode.

Press “∨” or “∧” on to select the desired track/file or

song.

Selecting a folder or album

Press to select the CD, USB memory or Bluetooth® audio

mode.

Press and hold “∨” or “∧” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting a disc in the CD player (type B only)

Press to select the CD mode.

Press and hold “∨” or “∧” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting a track/file or chapter (vehicles with rear seat entertainment system)

Press to select the RSE mode.

Press “∨” or “∧” on to select the desired track/file or

chapter.

CAUTION

nTo reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

365

Interior and exterior features

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Bluetooth® audio system∗

∗: If equipped

nConditions under which the system will not operate

lIf using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®

lIf the portable player is switched off

lIf the portable player is not connected

lIf the portable player’s battery is low

lIf the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box

lIf metal is covering or touching the portable player

The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on

a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle

speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system

capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your por-

table player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio sys-

tem will not function.

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to

the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Title Page

Using the Bluetooth® audio system P. 368

Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 373

Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 375

Bluetooth® audio system setup P. 380

366

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

nWhen transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-

erly accessed. (→P. 439)

nAbout Bluetooth®

nCompatible models

lBluetooth® specifications:

Ver. 1.2

lFollowing Profiles:

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0

• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Ver.

1.3 or higher recommended)

Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be

connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some

functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.

nCertification for the Bluetooth® audio system

FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035

IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035

MADE IN MEXICO

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

367

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior and exterior features

CAUTION

nFCC WARNING

Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

Radio frequency exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application

only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regula-

tions, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the

antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.

nCaution while driving

Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to portable players

Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the

vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

368

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Using the Bluetooth® audio system

nAudio unit

Display

A message, name, number,

etc. is displayed.

Lower-case characters and

special characters cannot

be displayed.

Displays information that is

too long to be displayed at

one time on the display

(press and hold)

Selects items such as menu

and number

Turn: Selects an item

Press: Inputs the selected

item

Bluetooth® connection con-

dition

If “BT” is not displayed, the

Bluetooth® audio system

cannot be used.

nMicrophone

369

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior and exterior features

Operating the system using voice commands

By following the voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,

voice commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio sys-

tem without the need to check the display or operate .

nOperation procedure when using voice commands

Press the talk switch and follow the voice guidance instructions.

nAuxiliary commands when using voice commands

The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the

system using a voice command:

“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio system

“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction

“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure

“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is

registered for the selected function

370

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time

Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register

a Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the proce-

dure below to register (pair) a portable player:

Press until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.

Press that corresponds to “SETUP”.

The introductory guidance and portable player name registration

instructions are heard.

Select “Pair Audio Player” using a voice command or .

methods:

a. Select “Record Name” using , and say the name to

be registered.

b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.

A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .

A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction

for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.

Input the passkey into the portable player.

Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the oper-

ation of the portable player.

Guidance for registration completion is heard.

If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be reg-

istered at the same time. (→P. 423)

371

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior and exterior features

Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system

nNormal operation

“BT•A Setup” can be canceled by pressing the on-hook switch or saying

the voice command, “Cancel”.

First

Second

menu Third menu Operation detail

“Setup”

“BT•A

Setup”

“Pair Audio Player” Registering a portable player

“Select Audio

Player”

Selecting a portable player to

be used

“Change Name” Changing the registered

name of a portable player

“List Audio Players”

Listing the registered portable

players

“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey

“Delete Audio” Deleting a registered portable

player

“System

Setup”

“Guidance

Volume”

Setting voice guidance vol-

ume

“Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth®

device address and name

“Initialize” Initializing the system

372

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

nWhen using a voice command

For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.

Say the command correctly and clearly.

nThe system may not recognize your voice in the following situations:

lWhen driving on rough roads

lWhen driving at high speeds

lWhen air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone

lWhen the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise

nOperations that cannot be performed while driving

lOperating the system with

lRegistering a portable player to the system

nChanging the passkey

→P. 378

373

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior and exterior features

Operating a Bluetooth

enabled portable player

Selecting an album

Press “∨” or “∧” on .

Selecting tracks

Turn or press “∨” or “∧” on to select the desired

track.

Playing and pausing tracks

Press .

Playback/pause

Displaying text messages

Selecting a track

Selecting

an album

Fast-forwarding

and reversing/

Selecting a track

Playback

VolumePower

Selector buttons

374

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks

Press and hold “∨” or “∧” on .

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track

title/Elapsed time

Using the steering wheel audio switches

→P. 3 6 2

nBluetooth® audio system functions

Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain

functions may not be available.

nError messages

“BT AUDIO ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the system.

375

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior and exterior features

Setting up a Bluetooth

enabled portable player

Registering a portable player

Select “Pair Audio Player” using a voice command or , and

perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (→P. 370)

Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows

the system to function. The following functions can be used for reg-

istered portable players:

nFunctions and operation procedures

Press until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.

Press that corresponds to “SETUP”.

Select one of the following functions using a voice com-

mand or .

lRegistering a portable player

“Pair Audio Player”

lSelecting a portable player to be used

“Select Audio Player”

lChanging the registered name

“Change Name”

lListing the registered portable players

“List Audio Players”

lChanging the passkey

“Set Passkey”

lDeleting a registered portable player

“Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”

376

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Selecting a portable player to be used

Select “Select Audio Player” using a voice command or

Select the portable player to be used by either of the following

methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired por-

table player.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When

the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press

the talk switch.

Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio”, and

select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically

connected whenever the engine switch is in either the ACC or ON

position.

377

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior and exterior features

Changing the registered name of a portable player

Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .

Select the name of the portable player to be changed by

either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a

voice command or :

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of desired portable

player.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When

the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press

the talk switch.

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using ,

and say the new name.

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .

Listing the registered portable players

Select “List Audio Players” using a voice command or . The

list of registered portable players will be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT·A Setup”.

Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being

read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will

become available:

lSelecting a portable player: “Select Audio Player”

lChanging a registered name: “Change Name”

lDeleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”

378

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Changing the passkey

Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or .

Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select

“Confirm” using a voice command or .

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has

been input, press again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is

not necessary.

Deleting a registered portable player

Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice

command or .

Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the follow-

ing methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired por-

table player.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When

the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press

the talk switch.

If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone,

the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time.

A voice guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

379

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior and exterior features

nThe number of portable players that can be registered

Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.

380

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Bluetooth® audio system setup

nSystem setup items and operation procedures

lSetting voice guidance volume

1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Guidance Volume”

(→P. 438)

lDisplaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Device Name”

(→P. 439)

lInitialization

1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Initialize”

(→P. 439)

381

Interior and exterior features

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Rear seat entertainment system∗

∗: If equipped

The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passen-

gers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio

system.

Front separated type seats

Front audio system

DVD player

Display

Rear seat entertainment system remote controller

A/V input port

Power outlet

382

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Front bench type seat

Front audio system

DVD player

Display

Rear seat entertainment system remote controller

Power outlet

A/V input port

383

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Opening and closing the display

Press the lock release button to

open the display.

Pull the display down to an easily

viewable angle (between 90° and

125°).

To close the display, push the

display up until a click is heard.

The illumination of the screen is

automatically turned off when the

display is closed. However, the

rear seat entertainment system is

not turned off.

Loading a disc

Insert the disc into the slot with

the label side up.

The DISC indicator light turns on

while the disc is loaded.

The player will play the track or

chapter, and will repeat it after it

reaches the end.

384

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Ejecting a disc

Press and remove the

disc.

Turning the rear seat entertainment system power on/off

nOperating from the front audio system

Selecting either the front audio

system or DVD player audio

for the speakers

Press that corresponds

to “OFF”, to turn off the rear

seat entertainment system.

Press that corresponds to

“ON”, to turn on the rear seat

entertainment system.

385

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Setting the rear seat entertainment system lock

Front audio system

Selecting either the front audio

system or DVD player audio

for the speakers

Selecting “LOCK” or

“UNLOCK” for the rear seat

entertainment system

The rear seat entertainment sys-

tem lock remains on, even when

the engine switch is turned off.

DVD player display

386

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

nThe rear seat entertainment system can be used when

The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.

nDiscs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-

tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

nWhen appears on the screen

It indicates that the selected switch cannot work.

nError messages

“DISC CHECK”: Indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged or was

inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it

correctly.

“REGION CODE ERROR”:Indicates that the DVD region code is not set

properly.

“DVD ERROR”: Indicates that there is a problem inside the

player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

If the malfunction still exists, take the vehicle to

your Toyota dealer.

387

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

nBefore using the remote controller (for new vehicle owners)

nWhen the remote controller batteries are fully depleted

nIf the remote controller batteries are discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

lThe rear seat entertainment system control will not function properly.

lThe operational range is reduced.

nWhen replacing the AA batteries

Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, electric appliance shop, or

camera stores.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota

dealer.

Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

Remove the cover.

Remove the insulating sheet.

Remove the depleted batteries and install

3 new AA batteries.

388

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

nHeadphones

With some headphones generally available in the market, sound quality may

be poor. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine wireless head-

phones.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

nVolume

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to

emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming

that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD

will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to

a different audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.

CAUTION

nWhile driving

Do not use headphones.

Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

nWhen the rear seat entertainment system is not used

Keep the display closed.

In the event of an accident or sudden braking, the opened display may hit an

occupant’s body, resulting in injury.

nTo prevent accidents and electric shock

Do not disassemble or modify the remote controller.

nWhen the remote controller is not used

Stow the remote controller.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

nRemoved batteries and other parts

Keep away from children.

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.

389

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

NOTICE

nFor normal operation after replacing the batteries

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

lAlways work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

lDo not touch or move any other components inside the remote controller.

lDo not bend any of the battery terminals.

390

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Using the DVD player (DVD video)

nRemote controller

Turning on the DVD mode

Turning on/off the control

icon screen

Selecting a chapter

Reversing a disc

Turning on the menu screen

Turning on the title selection

screen

Searching the title

Changing the screen angle

Inputting the selected con-

trol icon

Turning off the screen

Selecting a control icon

Playing/pausing a disc

Fast-forwarding a disc

Stopping a disc

Changing the subtitle lan-

guage

Changing the audio lan-

guage

391

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

nUnit

Ejecting a disc

Turning on the DVD mode

Skipping to the desired

chapter

Playing/pausing a disc

Turning on/off the control

icon screen

Selecting a control icon

Inputting the selected con-

trol icon

392

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

nControl icon screen (Page1)

Turning off the control icon

screen on the screen

Displaying control icon

screen page 2

Turning on/off the title

selection screen for the disc

Turning on/off the menu

screen for the disc

Reversing a disc

Stopping a disc

Playing/pausing a disc

Fast-forwarding a disc

nControl icon screen (Page2)

Displaying the initial setting

screen

Displaying control icon

screen page 1

Searching the title

Returning to the previous

screen

Changing the audio lan-

guage

Changing the subtitle lan-

guage

Changing the angle

393

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Turning on/off the control icon screen

Press or to turn on the control icon screen.

Press or once again or select to turn off the control

icon screen.

NOTICE

nCleaning the screen

Wipe the screen with a dry soft cloth.

If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be

scratched.

nTo prevent damage to the remote controller

lKeep the remote controller away from direct sunlight, heat and high

humidity.

lDo not drop or knock the remote controller against hard objects.

lDo not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote controller.

nDVD player

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert any-

thing other than a disc into the slot.

nOperating from the front audio system

Press: Selecting a chapter

Press and hold: Fast-for-

warding/reversing a disc

Stopping/playing a disc

Selecting the DVD mode

Starting a disc

Displaying a elapsed time

Playing/pausing a disc

394

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Turning on the title selection screen

Press or select to turn on the title selection screen. For

the operation of the title selection screen, see the separate manual

for the DVD disc.

Turning on the menu screen

Press or select to turn on the menu screen. For the oper-

ation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Returning to the previous screen

Select to return to the previous screen. For the operation of the

menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Searching for a title

Press or select to

display the screen to search for a

title.

Select the title number, and press

or to input it.

Select to return to the pre-

vious screen.

395

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Changing the subtitle language

Press or select to

display the subtitle language

screen.

Each time is pressed or

is selected, another lan-

guage stored on the disc is

selected.

Select to return to the pre-

vious screen.

Changing the audio language

Press or select to

display the audio language

screen.

Each time is pressed or

is selected, another lan-

guage stored on the disc is

selected.

Select to return to the pre-

vious screen.

396

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Changing the angle

Press or select to

display the screen to change the

angle.

Each time is pressed or

is selected, the angle

changes.

Select to return to the pre-

vious screen.

nDVD player and DVD video discs

This DVD player is compatible with NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs

conforming to other formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used.

nRegion codes

Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating where you can use

them. If the DVD video disc is not labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in

this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc in

this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the screen. Even if the

DVD video disc does not have a region code, in some cases you cannot use

it.

397

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

nMarks shown on DVD video discs

nDVD video disc glossary

lDVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discs that hold world’s standard video.

DVD video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of

digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/

40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology has been

adopted in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed

depending on the picture format. Audio data is stored using PCM and

Dolby digital, which enables higher sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and

multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced tech-

nology of DVD video.

lViewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity

with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies

depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be

played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.

• Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.

• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be

played.

• Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.

Indicates NTSC format of color TV.

Indicates the number of audio tracks.

Indicates the number of language subtitles.

Indicates the number of angles.

Indicates the screen to be selected.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions in which this video disc can

be played.

All: all countries

Number: region code

398

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

lMulti-angle feature: Allows you to enjoy the same scene at different

angles.

lMulti-language feature: Allows you to select the language of the subtitles

and audio.

lRegion codes: Region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD

discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the

DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player.

lAudio: This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby digital, dts and

MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded types cannot be played.

lTitle and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs

are divided into sections by title and chapter.

lTitle: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD

video discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one album, or one audio pro-

gram is assigned as a title.

lChapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title comprises multiple chapters.

nAudio

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Dolby

Digital”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Confidential unpublished works.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

399

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Using the DVD player (video CD)

nRemote controller

Turning on the DVD mode

Turning on/off the control

icon screen

Selecting a chapter

Reversing a disc

Searching the disc menu

number

Inputting the selected con-

trol icon

Turning off the screen

Selecting a control icon

Playing/pausing a disc

Fast-forwarding a disc

Stopping a disc

Changing the initial setting

nUnit

Ejecting a disc

Turning on the DVD mode

Skipping to the desired

chapter

Playing/pausing a disc

Turning on/off the control

icon screen

Selecting a control icon

Inputting the selected con-

trol icon

400

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

nControl icon screen (Page1)

Selecting a disc menu num-

ber

Turning off the menu screen

Displaying control icon

screen page 2

Turning on the disc menu

Returning to the previous

page screen (with the disc

menu displayed)

Proceeding to the next page

screen (with the disc menu

displayed)

Changing to a multiplex

transmission

nControl icon screen (Page2)

Displaying control icon

screen page 1

Reversing a disc

Playing/pausing a disc

Fast-forwarding a disc

401

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Selecting a disc menu number

Select to display the disc menu number search screen.

Select the disc menu number, and press or to input it.

Select to return to the previous screen.

nOperating from the front audio system

Press: Selecting a chapter

Press and hold: Fast-for-

warding/reversing a disc

Stopping/playing a disc

Selecting the DVD mode

Starting a disc

Displaying a elapsed time

Playing/pausing a disc

402

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Using the DVD player (audio CD/CD text)

Repeat play

nRepeating a track

Select .

Random playback

nPlaying all of the tracks on a CD in random order

Select .

nControl screen

Press or to dis-

play the control screen.

Repeat play

Random playback

Search playback

nOperating from the front audio system

Press: Selecting a track

Press and hold: Fast-for-

warding/reversing a disc

Selecting the DVD mode

Displaying a elapsed time

Playing/pausing a disc

Random playback

(→P. 330)

Repeat play (→P. 330)

403

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Search playback

nScanning tracks

Select .

The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.

Select again when the desired track is reached.

nCanceling repeat play and random playback

Select or once again.

404

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Using the DVD player (MP3 discs)

Repeat play

nRepeating a file

Select .

nRepeating all of the files in the folder

Select , and press and hold or .

nControl screen

Press or to dis-

play the control screen.

Repeat play

Random playback

Search playback

Displaying file information

Selecting a folder

nOperating from the front audio system

Press: Selecting a file

Press and hold: Fast-for-

warding/reversing a file

Selecting the DVD mode

Displaying a elapsed time

Playing/pausing a disc

Random playback

(→P. 337)

Repeat play (→P. 338)

405

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Random playback

nPlaying files from a particular folder in random order

Select .

nPlaying all of the files on a disc in random order

Select , and press and hold or .

Selecting and scanning folders

nSelecting folders one at a time

To select the desired folder, select or .

nScanning the desired folder by cueing the first file of each

folder

Select , and press and hold or .

The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.

When the desired folder is reached, select once

again.

Scanning files

nScanning the desired file by cueing the files in the folder

Select .

The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.

When the desired file is reached, select once again.

Displaying file information

Select .

406

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

nCanceling repeat play and random playback

Select or once again.

407

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Using the video mode

Using the A/V input port

Front separated type seats

Open the cover.

The A/V input port is composed of

3 input ports.

Yellow: Image input port

White: Left channel audio input

port

Red: Right channel audio input

port

Front bench type seat

Open the cover.

The A/V input port is composed of

3 input ports.

Yellow: Image input port

White: Left channel audio input

port

Red: Right channel audio input

port

Press or to select

the video mode.

Before switching to the video

mode, connect the audio

source to the A/V input port.

408

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

nA/V input port

The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audio-

visual equipment is connected to the A/V input port. For details, refer to the

manufacturer’s instructions.

nPower outlet

The power outlet can be used to connect the audio-visual device.

(→P. 483, 488)

NOTICE

nWhen the A/V input port is not in use

Keep the A/V input port cover closed.

Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical fail-

ure or a short circuit.

409

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Changing the Setup Menu settings

Changing the audio language

Select .

Select the language you want to

hear, and press or to

input it.

Press or select to

display the initial setting

screen.

The following settings can be

customized here.

lAudio language

lSubtitle language

lDVD language

lAngle mark

lParental lock

410

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Select if you cannot

find the language you would like

to hear.

Enter the appropriate 4-digit lan-

guage code. (→P. 414)

Select a number, and press

or to input it.

If a code that is not in the list is

entered, “Incorrect Code” will

appear on the screen.

Changing the subtitle language

Select .

Select the language you would

like to read, and press or

to input it.

Select if you cannot

find the language you would like

to read.

Enter the appropriate 4-digit lan-

guage code. (→P. 414)

Select a number, and press

or to input it.

If a code that is not in the list is

entered, “Incorrect Code” will

appear on the screen.

411

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Changing the DVD language

Select .

Select the language you would

like to hear and press or

to input it.

Select if you cannot

find the language you would like

to hear.

Enter the appropriate 4-digit lan-

guage code. (→P. 414)

Select a number, and press

or to input it.

If a code that is not in the list is

entered, “Incorrect Code” will

appear on the screen.

Turning on/off the angle mark

The angle mark can be turned on for discs that are multi-angle com-

patible.

Each time you press or when is selected, the

angle mark turns on or off.

412

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Setting viewer restriction levels

Setting a personal code allows the viewer restriction to be used.

Select .

Enter a personal code and press

or .

The setting cannot be changed

unless a personal code is

entered.

When you forget a personal code,

initialize a personal code.

(→P. 414)

Select a restriction level (1-8),

and press or . The

smaller the level number, the

stricter the restrictions.

Initializing all menus

Select .

Turning off the Setup Menu screen

Select .

413

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Setting the display mode

Pressing changes the dis-

play mode sequentially as fol-

lows:

Normal → Wide 1 → Wide 2

Returning to the previous screen

Select to return to the previous screen.

414

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

nTo initialize the password

Press on the remote controller or unit ten times when the Enter Personal

Code screen is displayed.

nLanguage code list

Code Language

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots-Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

Code Language

415

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

Interior and exterior features

Code Language

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1001 Japanese

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto-Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo-Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

Code Language

416

3-4. Using the rear audio/video system

nAdjusting the screen

Code Language

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

Code Language

Press .

Select the brightness, contrast, tone or

color, and make adjustments. Press

or or to input it.

“-” or “Red” “+” or “Green”

Brightness Darkens Brightens

Contrast Weakens the contrast Strengthens the con-

trast

Tone Weakens the tone Strengthens the tone

Color Strengthens the red

color

Strengthens the green

color

417

Interior and exterior features

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free phone system features∗

∗: If equipped

This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or

receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and

the system, and without operating the cellular phone.

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to

the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

nHands-free system quick guide

Setting a cellular phone. (→P. 421)

Adding an entry to the phonebook (Up to 20 names can be

stored). (→P. 440)

Dialing by inputting a name. (→P. 430)

418

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Title Page

Using the hands-free phone system

nOperating the system by using a voice

command

nUsing the hands-free system for the

first time

nMenu list of the hands-free phone sys-

tem

P. 421

Making a phone call

nDialing by inputting a number

nDialing by inputting a name

nSpeed dialing

nWhen receiving a phone call

nTransferring a call

nUsing the call history memory

P. 429

Setting a cellular phone

nRegistering a cellular phone

nSelecting the cellular phone to be used

nChanging a registered name

nListing the registered cellular phone

nChanging the passkey

nTurning the hands-free phone auto-

matic connection on/off

P. 433

Security and system setup

nSetting or changing the PIN

nLocking or unlocking the phone book

nSetting voice guidance volume

nInitialization

P. 437

Using the phone book

nAdding a new phone number

nSetting speed dials

nChanging a registered names

nDeleting registered data

nDeleting speed dials

nListing the registered data

P. 440

419

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

nConditions affecting operation

The hands-free phone system may not operate normally in the following situ-

ations:

lThe cellular phone is turned off, or located outside the service area.

lThe cellular phone has a low battery.

lThe cellular phone is not connected to the system.

lThe cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box, or metal mate-

rial covers or touches the phone.

nWhen transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-

erly accessed.

nRequired profiles for the cellular phone

lHFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0

lOPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1

nFor detailed information about Handsfree Phone System

For assistance with pairing and operating your cell phone, go to the website

www.toyota.letstalk.com.

nAbout Bluetooth®

nCertification for the hands-free phone system

FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035

IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035

MADE IN MEXICO

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

420

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

CAUTION

nFCC WARNING

Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

Radio frequency exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application

only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regula-

tions, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the

antenna and the body of any person at all times during use.

nCaution while driving

Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth® phone.

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to a cellular phone

Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may

become high resulting in damage to the phone.

421

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Using the hands-free phone system

nAudio unit

Display

A message, name, phone

number, etc. is displayed.

Lower-case characters and

special characters, such as

an umlaut, cannot be dis-

played.

Displays information that is

too long to be displayed at

one time on the display

(press and hold)

Selects speed dials

Selects items such as menu

or number

Turn: Selects an item

Press: Inputs the selected

item

Bluetooth® connection con-

dition and reception level

If “BT” is not displayed, the

hands-free phone system

cannot be used.

422

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

nSteering wheel

Volume

The voice guidance volume

cannot be adjusted using this

button.

On-hook switch

Turns the hands-free sys-

tem off/ends a call/refuses a

call

Off-hook switch

Turns the hands-free sys-

tem on/starts a call

Talk switch

Turns the voice command

system on (press)/turns the

voice command system off

(press and hold)

nMicrophone

423

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Operating the system by using a voice command

By following the voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,

voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone sys-

tem without the need to check the display or operate .

nOperation procedure when using a voice command

Press the talk switch and follow the voice guidance instructions.

nAuxiliary commands when using a voice command

The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the

system using a voice command:

“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system

“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction

“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure

“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is

registered for the selected function

Using the hands-free phone system for the first time

Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register

a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be

entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular

phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular

phone:

Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.

The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions

are heard.

Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or .

424

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

a. Select “Record Name” by using , and say a name to

be registered.

b. Press the talk switch and say a name to be registered.

A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

Registration to the hands-free phone system only

Select “Phone Only” using a voice command or .

Registration to the hands-free phone system and Bluetooth® audio

system at the same time

Select “Internal Audio (Int. Audio)” using a voice command or

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction

for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.

Input the passkey into the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-

ation of the phone.

Guidance for registration completion is heard.

425

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Menu list of the hands-free phone system

nNormal operation

First menu Second

menu Third menu Operation detail

“Callback” - - Dialing a number stored in the

incoming call history memory

“Redial” - - Dialing a number stored in the

outgoing call history memory

“Dial by

number” - - Dialing by inputting a number

“Dial by

name” --

Dialing by inputting a name reg-

istered in the phone book

“Phonebook”

“Add Entry” - Adding a new number

“Change

Name” -Changing a name in the phone

book

“Delete

Entry” - Deleting the phone book data

“Delete

Speed

Dial”

- Deleting a registered speed dial

“List

Names” - Listing the phone book data

“Set Speed

Dial”

(Speed

Dial)

- Registering a speed dial

426

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

“Setup”

“Security”

“Set PIN” Setting a PIN code

“Phone-

book Lock” Locking the phone book

“Phone-

book

Unlock”

Unlocking the phone book

“Phone

Setup”

“Pair

Phone”

Registering the cellular phone

to be used

“Change

Name”

Changing a registered name of

a cellular phone

“Delete

Phone”

Deleting a registered cellular

phone

“List

phones”

Listing the registered cellular

phones

“Select

phone”

Selecting a cellular phone to be

used

“Set Pass-

key” Changing the passkey

“Hands-free

power”

Setting the hands-free power

on/off

“System

Setup”

“Guidance

Volume” Setting voice guidance volume

“Device

Name” Displaying device information

“Initialize” Initialization

First menu Second

menu Third menu Operation detail

427

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

nUsing a short cut key

First menu Second menu Operation detail

“Dial XXX (name)” - Dialing a number registered

in the phone book

“Dial XXX (number)” - Dialing the input numbers

“Phone book add

entry” - Adding a new number

“Phone book

change name” -

Changing the name of a

phone number in the phone

book

“Phone book delete

entry” - Deleting phone book data

“Phone book set

speed dial” - Registering a speed dial

“Phone book delete

speed dial” - Deleting a speed dial

“Phonebook” “Phonebook Unlock” Unlocking the phone book

“Phonebook Lock” Locking the phone book

428

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

nAutomatic volume adjustment

When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically

increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle

speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.

nWhen using a voice command

For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),

∗ (star), and + (plus).

Say a command correctly and clearly.

nThe system may not recognize your voice in the following situations:

lWhen driving on a rough road

lWhen driving at high speeds

lWhen air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone

lWhen the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise

nOperations that cannot be performed while driving

lOperating the system with

lRegistering a cellular phone to the system

nChanging the passkey

→P. 436

429

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Making a phone call

Dialing by inputting a number

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.

Press the talk switch and say the phone number.

Dial by one of the following methods:

a. Press the off-hook switch.

b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.

c. Select “Dial” by using .

nMaking a phone call

lDialing by inputting a number

“Dial by number”

lDialing by inputting a name

“Dial by name”

lSpeed dialing

lDialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory

“Redial”

lDialing a number stored in the incoming history memory

“Call back”

nReceiving a phone call

lAnswering the phone

lRefusing the call

nTransferring a call

nUsing the call history memory

lDialing

lStoring data in the phone book

lDeleting

430

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Dialing by inputting a name

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.

Select a registered name to be input by either of the following

methods:

a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List names”. Press the talk

switch while the desired name is being read aloud.

Dial by one of the following methods:

a. Press the off-hook switch.

b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.

c. Select “Dial” by using .

Speed dialing

Press the off-hook switch.

Press the preset button in which the desired number is regis-

tered.

Press the off-hook switch.

When receiving a phone call

nAnswering the phone

Press the off-hook switch.

nRefusing the call

Press the on-hook switch.

431

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Transferring a call

A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system

while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the follow-

ing methods:

a. Operate the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-

ation of the phone.

b. Press the off-hook switch*1.

c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2.

*1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call

from the cellular phone to the system during a call.

*2: While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from

the system to the cellular phone.

Using the call history memory

Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history

memory:

Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number

stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back”

(when using a number stored in the incoming call history

memory).

Select the number by either of the following methods:

a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is dis-

played.

b. Select the desired number by using .

432

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

The following operations can be performed:

Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” by using a voice

command or .

Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a

voice command or .

Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .

nCall history

Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call his-

tory memories.

nWhen talking on the phone

lDo not talk simultaneously with the other party.

lKeep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will

increase.

433

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Setting a cellular phone

Registering a cellular phone

Select “Pair Phone” by using a voice command or , and do the

procedure for registering a cellular phone. (→P. 423)

Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows

the system to function. The following functions can be used for reg-

istered cellular phones:

nFunctions and operation procedures

To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below by

using a voice command or :

lRegistering a cellular phone

1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Pair Phone”

lSelecting the cellular phone to be used

1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Select Phone”

lChanging a registered name

1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Change Name”

lListing the registered cellular phones

1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “List Phones”

lDeleting a cellular phone

1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Delete Phone”

lChanging the passkey

1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Set Passkey”

lTurning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off

1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Hands-free power”

434

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Selecting the cellular phone to be used

Select “Select Phone” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

Select the cellular phone to be used by either of the following

methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name

of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the

talk switch.

Pattern B

Select the cellular phone to be used by using .

Changing a registered name

Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .

Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by either

of the following methods:

a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name, and

select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the

desired phone name is being read aloud, press the talk

switch.

c. Select the desired phone name by using .

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” by using

, and say a new name.

435

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

Listing the registered cellular phones

Selecting “List Phones” by using a voice command or causes

the list of registered cellular phones to be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.

Pressing the talk switch while the name of a cellular phone is being

read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be

available:

• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”

• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”

• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete Phone”

Deleting a cellular phone

Select “Delete Phone” by using a voice command or .

Select the cellular phone to be deleted by either of the follow-

ing methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command

or :

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellu-

lar phone.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name

of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the

talk switch.

436

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Changing the passkey

Select “Set Passkey” by using a voice command or .

Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or .

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has

been input, press again.

Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off

nTurning off the automatic connection

Select “Handsfree Power” by using a voice command or

Select “Turn off” by using a voice command or .

nTurning on the automatic connection

Select “Handsfree Power” by using a voice command or

Select “Turn on” by using a voice command or .

nThe number of cellular phones that can be registered

Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.

437

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Security and system setup

Setting or changing the PIN

nSetting a PIN

Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .

Enter a PIN by using a voice command or .

When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

nSecurity setting items and operation procedure

lSetting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)

1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Set PIN”

lLocking the phone book

1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Lock”

lUnlocking the phone book

1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Unlock”

nSystem setup items and operation procedure

lSetting voice guidance volume

1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Guidance Volume”

lDisplaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Device name”

lInitialization

1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Initialize”

can only be used for system setup operation.

438

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

nChanging the PIN

Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .

Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or

Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or .

When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.

Locking or unlocking the phone book

Select “Phonebook lock” or “Phonebook unlock” by using a

voice command or .

Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or :

a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.

b. Input a new PIN by using .

Setting voice guidance volume

Select “Guidance Volume” by using .

Change the voice guidance volume.

To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.

To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.

439

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

Select “Device Name” using .

Turn to display the Bluetooth® device address and

name.

Select “Go Back” using to return to “System Setup”

Initialization

Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” by using .

Select “Confirm” by using .

nInitialization

lThe following data in the system can be initialized:

• Phone book

• Outgoing and incoming call history

• Speed dials

• Registered cellular phone data

• Security code

lOnce the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored

to its original state.

nWhen the phone book is locked

The following functions cannot be used:

lDialing by inputting a name

lSpeed dialing

lDialing a number stored in the call history memory

lUsing the phone book

440

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Using the phone book

Adding a new phone number

The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:

lInputting a phone number by using a voice command

lTransferring data from the cellular phone

lInputting a phone number by using

lSelecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

lAdding a new phone number

1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Add Entry”

lSetting speed dial

1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

lChanging a registered name

1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Change Name”

lDeleting registered data

1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Entry”

lDeleting speed dial

1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Speed Dial”

lListing the registered data

1. “Phonebook” → 2. “List Names”

441

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

nAdding procedure

Select “Add Entry” by using a voice command or .

Use one of the following methods to input a telephone num-

ber:

Inputting a telephone number by using a voice command

STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” by using a voice command or

STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and

select “Confirm” by using a voice command.

Transferring data from the cellular phone

STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” by using a

voice command or .

STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for

the details of transferring data.

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the fol-

lowing methods:

a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is

displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice

command.

b. Select the desired data by using .

Inputting a phone number by using

STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” by using .

STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using , and press

once again.

Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.

442

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history

STEP2-1 Select “Call History” by using a voice command or

STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice

command or .

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the fol-

lowing methods:

a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data

is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a

voice command.

b. Select the desired data by using .

Select the name to be registered by either of the following

methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.

b. Select “Record Name” by using , and say the

desired name.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

In , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of

“Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.

443

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Setting speed dials

Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” by using a voice com-

mand or .

Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of

the following methods:

a. Press the talk switch, say desired number, and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the

desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,

and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

c. Select the desired data by using .

Select the desired preset button, and register the data into

speed dial by either of the following methods:

a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by

using a voice command or .

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

444

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Changing a registered name

Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .

Select the name to be changed by either of the following

methods.

a. Press the talk switch, say desired name, and select “Con-

firm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the

desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch and

select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

c. Select the desired name by using .

Select “Record Name” with or the talk switch.

Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice com-

mand or .

Deleting registered data

Select “Delete Entry” by using a voice command or .

Select the data to be deleted by either of the following meth-

ods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch, and say the name of the desired

phone number to be deleted.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name

of the desired phone number is being read aloud, press the

talk switch.

445

3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Interior and exterior features

Deleting speed dials

Select “Delete Speed Dial” by using a voice command or

Press the preset button for which the desired speed dial is

registered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

Listing the registered data

Selecting “List names” by using a voice command causes a list of the

registered data to be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.

Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud

selects the data, and the following functions will be available.

• Dialing: “Dial”

• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”

• Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”

• Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

nLimitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

446

3-6. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Your Toyota is equipped with an illuminated entry system to assist in

entering the vehicle. Due to the function of the system, the lights

shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off accord-

ing to whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are

opened/closed, and the engine switch position.

Outer foot lights (if equipped)

Personal/interior lights (→P. 448)

Engine switch light (if equipped)

Foot well lighting (if equipped)

Cargo lamp (→P. 450)

447

3-6. Using the interior lights

Interior and exterior features

Personal/interior light main switch

The personal/interior lights can-

not be individually turned off.

DOOR position

The personal/interior lights come

on when a door is opened. They

turn off when the doors are

closed.

OFF

The personal/interior lights can

be individually turned on or off.

nTo prevent the battery from being discharged

Personal/interior light

If the interior/personal lights remain on when a door is not fully closed and

the personal/interior light main switch is in the DOOR position, the lights

will turn off automatically after 20 minutes.

Cargo lamp

If the cargo lamp remains on when a door is not fully closed and the cargo

lamp main switch is in the DOOR position, the lights will turn off automati-

cally after 20 minutes.

nCustomization

lThat can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-informa-

tion display)

lSettings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.

(Customizable features →P. 683)

lIt is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information dis-

play) (Feature customization →P. 205)

Personal/interior light main switch

448

3-6. Using the interior lights

Personal/interior lights

Front (type A)

On/off

Front (type B)

On/off

Front (type C)

On/off

Personal/interior lights

449

3-6. Using the interior lights

Interior and exterior features

Rear (type A)

On/off

Rear (type B)

On/off

Rear (type C)

On/off

Personal/interior lights

450

3-6. Using the interior lights

Rear (type D)

On/off

Cargo lamp main switch

The cargo lamp can not be indi-

vidually turned off.

DOOR position

The cargo lamp comes on when a

door is opened. They turn off

when the doors are closed.

OFF

The cargo lamp can be individu-

ally turned on or off.

Personal/interior lights and cargo lamp main switch

451

Interior and exterior features

3-7. Using the storage features

List of storage features

Front separated type seats

Bottle holders

Auxiliary boxes

Card holder

Overhead console

Glove boxes

Map holder

Front cup holders

Console box

• Card holder

• Map holder

• Pen holder

• Tissue pocket

Rear cup holders (if equipped)

Storage box (if equipped)

452

3-7. Using the storage features

Front bench type seat

Bottle holders

Auxiliary boxes

Card holder

Overhead console

Glove boxes

Front cup holders

Pen holder

Auxiliary box

• Card holder

• Map holder

• Tissue pocket

Rear cup holders (if equipped)

Storage box (if equipped)

453

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Glove boxes

Upper glove box

Press the button.

Lower glove box

Unlock with the master key

Lock with the master key

CAUTION

nItems that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this

may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

lGlasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact

with other stored items.

lLighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other

stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,

causing a fire hazard.

Glove boxes

454

3-7. Using the storage features

Pull the lever up.

CAUTION

nItems that should not be left in the upper glove box

Do not leave glasses or lighters in the box.

If the interior of the vehicle become hot, lighters may explode and glasses

may warp or becomes cracked.

nCaution while driving

Keep the glove box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Glove boxes

455

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Console box (front separated type seats only)

Pull the knob up and lift the lid.

nTray in the console box

The tray slides forward or backward. The

tray can be removed.

Console box

456

3-7. Using the storage features

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

The box can be removed. Hanging file

folders can be hung on the rails when the

box is removed.

Console box

457

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Card holder

Overhead console (type A)

Press the lid.

Overhead console (type B)

Press the lid.

Card holder

458

3-7. Using the storage features

Console box (front separated type seats)

Pull the knob up and lift the lid.

Back of the front center seatback (front bench type seat)

Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback.

Card holder

459

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Push the knob and lift the lid.

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Keep the auxiliary box, console box or holder closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Card holder

460

3-7. Using the storage features

Map holder

Center console (front separated type seats)

Push the tab down to release

the lock and remove the lid.

Stow the lid.

Map holder

461

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Console box (front separated type seats)

Pull the lever up and lift the lid.

Back of the front center seatback (front bench type seat)

Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback.

Map holder

462

3-7. Using the storage features

Push the knob and lift the lid.

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Keep the auxiliary or console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Map holder

463

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Pen holder

Front separated type seats

Pull the knob up and lift the lid.

Pen holder

464

3-7. Using the storage features

Front bench type seat

Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback.

CAUTION

nCaution while driving (front separated type seats only)

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Pen holder

465

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Tissue pocket

Front separated type seats

Pull the knob up and lift the lid.

Front bench type seat

Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback.

Tissue pocket

466

3-7. Using the storage features

Push the knob and lift the lid.

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Keep the auxiliary or console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Tissue pocket

467

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Overhead console

The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses

and similar small items.

Type A

Push the knob forward to open

the console.

Type B

Push the knob forward to open

the console.

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.

Items stored in it may fall out and cause injury.

Overhead console

468

3-7. Using the storage features

Front cup holders

Separated type seats

Bench type seat

Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback.

Front cup holders

469

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

nRemoving the cup holder (separated type seats only)

CAUTION

nItems unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or

sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent

burns.

Push the tab down to release the lock

and remove the lid.

Stow the lid.

Pull the cup holder up and remove it.

Front cup holders

470

3-7. Using the storage features

Rear cup holders

Double Cab models with front separated type seats

Pull the lid down.

Double Cab models with front bench type seat

Pull the lid down.

CrewMax models

Pull the armrest down.

Rear cup holders

471

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Bottle holders

Instrument panel (front bench type seat)

Push the lid.

Front door

CAUTION

nItems unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or

sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent

burns.

Rear cup holders and bottle holders

472

3-7. Using the storage features

Rear door (type A)

Rear door (type B)

nRemoving the hold separator (front bench type seat only)

CAUTION

nWhen not in use (front bench type seat only)

Keep the bottle holders closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Remove the hold separator.

Bottle holders

473

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Auxiliary boxes

Front door

Press the knob and open the lid.

Front bench type seat (type A)

Pull the strap.

NOTICE

nItems that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-

tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may

spill and glasses may break.

Bottle holders and auxiliary boxes

474

3-7. Using the storage features

Front bench type seat (type B)

Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback.

Push the knob and lift the lid.

Front bench type seat (type C)

Pull the lever up and fold down

the seatback.

Auxiliary boxes

475

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

Push the knob and lift the lid.

Storage box (if equipped)

nUsing the storage box

Pull the lever up and raise the

rear seat cushion.

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Keep the auxiliary boxes closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Auxiliary boxes and storage box

476

3-7. Using the storage features

Turn the knob in the OPEN

direction.

Lift the lid.

nRemove the storage box

Pull the lever up and raise the

rear seat cushion.

Turn the knob in the OPEN

direction.

Lift the lid.

Remove the lids.

Turn the knobs counterclock-

wise.

Remove the storage box.

Storage box

477

3-7. Using the storage features

Interior and exterior features

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Keep the storage box lids closed.

Injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

nTo prevent damage to the storage box

Do not put heavy loads on the lids.

Storage box

478

3-8. Other interior features

Sun visors

nMain visor

Forward position:

Flip down.

Side position:

Flip down, unhook, and

swing to the side.

Side extender:

Place in side position then

slide backwards.

nSub visor (if equipped)

Flip down.

479

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

Vanity mirrors∗

∗: If equipped

Vehicles without vanity light

Open the cover.

Vehicles with vanity light

Open the cover.

The light turns on when the

cover is opened.

Adjust the brightness of the

light.

480

3-8. Other interior features

Clock

nFor quicker adjustment of the clock (if equipped)

Hold down the M or H button continuously. This allows faster advancement

of the minutes and hours.

nThe clock is displayed when

The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.

nWhen disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

Adjusts the hours.

Adjusts the minutes.

481

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

Outside temperature display∗

∗: If equipped

Displays the outside air

temperature.

The temperature range that

can be displayed is from -40°F

(-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).

Switches the outside air

temperature display

between °C (Celsius) and

°F (Fahrenheit). (if

equipped)

Vehicles without multi-informa-

tion display:

Push the SETUP button until

the desired unit of measure-

ment is displayed.

Vehicles with multi-information

display:

With the customized unit-

change operation for the multi-

information display, the unit of

measurement can be changed.

(→P. 211)

482

3-8. Other interior features

nWhen – –°C or – –°F is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

nThe outside air temperature is displayed when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

nWhen disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The display will automatically be set to the initial mode.

nDisplay

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

lWhen stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

lWhen the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/

exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

483

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

Power outlets (12V DC)

The power outlet can be used for accessories that run on less than

10A.

Type A (Instrument panel)

484

3-8. Other interior features

Type B (Instrument panel)

Type C (Back of the front center seatback)

485

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

Type D (Inside of the console box)

Type E (Back of the console box)

486

3-8. Other interior features

nThe power outlet can be used when

The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Type F (Back of the front center seatback)

Type G (Back of the console box)

487

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

NOTICE

nTo avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-

cuit.

nTo prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V/10A.

nTo prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is

stopped.

488

3-8. Other interior features

Power outlets (115V AC)∗

∗: If equipped

nThe power outlet can be used when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

The power outlet can be used for accessories that use less than

100W.

Front separated type seats

Power outlet socket

Front bench type seat

Power outlet socket

489

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

CAUTION

nUsing a power outlet

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.

lUse of the power outlet when it is wet with drinking water or snow may

result in electrical shocks and is extremely dangerous. The power outlet

must be thoroughly dried before use.

lDo not allow children to use or play with the power outlet.

lBe careful not to get any part of your body caught in the power outlet lid.

lWhen using electrical appliances, strictly follow any cautions and notices

written on their labels and in the manufacturers’ instruction manuals.

lDo not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet or its inverter, in any

way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunctions or accidents, which

could cause serious damage or injuries. Contact a Toyota dealer for any

necessary repairs.

nTo prevent injuries and accidents, securely fix all electric appliances

before use and do not use any appliances that may do any of the fol-

lowing

lDistract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving.

lResult in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or over-

heating while driving.

lEmit steam, while the windows of the cabin are closed.

nTo prevent unexpected accidents, such as electric shocks, do not per-

form any of the following

lUsing the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping.

lContaminating the power outlet with liquid substances or mud.

lHandling electrical appliance plugs at the power outlet with wet hands or

feet.

lInserting foreign objects into the power outlet.

lUsing malfunctioning electric appliances.

lInserting inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet.

490

3-8. Other interior features

NOTICE

nTo avoid damaging the power outlet and the plug

lClose the power outlet lid when not in use.

lForeign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short

circuit.

lDo not use plug adaptors to connect too many plugs to the power outlet.

lAfter inserting a plug, gently close the power outlet lid.

nTo prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use a 115V AC appliance that requires more than 100W.

If a 115V AC appliance that consumes more than 100W is used, the protec-

tion circuit will cut the power supply.

nAppliances that may not operate properly

The following 115V AC appliances may not operate even if their power con-

sumption is under 100W.

lAppliances with high initial peak wattage

lMeasuring devices that process precise data

lOther appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

nTo prevent the battery from being discharged

Turn off all the vehicle’s electronic equipment and accessories, such as the

headlights and air conditioning, when electrical appliances that consume in

excess of 100W are used continuously for long periods of time.

nTo prevent any damage caused by heat

lDo not use any electrical appliances that give off intense heat such as

toasters, in any locations including the internal or external trim, seats and

deck.

lDo not use any electrical appliances, which are easily affected by vibration

or heat, inside the vehicle.

Vibration while driving, or the heat of the sun while parking, may result in

damage to those electrical appliances.

nIf any electrical appliances are to be used while driving

Securely fasten both the appliances and their cables to prevent them from

falling or getting caught any of the power train components.

491

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

NOTICE

nIf the power outlet is loose when an electrical appliance plug is con-

nected

Replace the outlet.

Contact a Toyota dealer for any necessary replacements.

nIf the power outlet gets dirty

Turn the main switch off and use a soft, clean cloth to wipe it gently.

Do not use any cleansing materials, such as organic solvents, wax, or com-

pound cleaners, as these may damage the power outlet or cause it to mal-

function.

492

3-8. Other interior features

Seat heaters∗

∗: If equipped

nThe seat heaters can be used when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

nWhen not in use

Turn the dial fully downward. The indicator turns off.

The indicator comes on.

Adjusts the seat tempera-

ture.

The further you turn the dial

upward, the warmer the seat

becomes.

493

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

CAUTION

nBurns

lUse caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat

heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

lDo not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature

of the seat and may lead to overheating.

NOTICE

nTo prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp

objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

nTo prevent battery discharge

Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.

494

3-8. Other interior features

Seat heaters and ventilators∗

∗: If equipped

nThe seat heaters can be used when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

nWhen not in use

Set the dial to 0. The indicator turns off.

Blows air from the seats

The indicator comes on. The

higher the number, the stron-

ger the airflow becomes.

Heats the seats

The indicator comes on. The

higher the number, the warmer

the seats become.

495

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

CAUTION

nBurns

lUse caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat

heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

lDo not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature

of the seat and may lead to overheating.

NOTICE

nTo prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp

objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

nTo prevent battery discharge

Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.

496

3-8. Other interior features

Armrest (CrewMax models only)

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to the armrest

lDo not place too much strain on the armrest.

lDo not sit on the armrest.

Pull the armrest down for use.

497

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

Seatback table∗

∗: If equipped

CAUTION

nCaution while driving

Observe the following precautions to avoid death or serious injury.

lDo not set up the seatback table.

lDo not sit on or place anything on the seatback table.

Front passenger’s seatback can be used as a temporary table only

when the vehicle is stopped.

Fold down the front passen-

ger’s seat to use the seatback

table. (→P. 61)

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to the seatback table

Do not put heavy loads on the table.

498

3-8. Other interior features

Floor mat

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering

with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may

become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.

nWhen installing the driver’s floor mat

lDo not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year

vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

lOnly use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.

lAlways install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-

vided.

lDo not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

lDo not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same

model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place

onto the carpet.

Fix the floor mat in place using

the retaining hooks (clips) pro-

vided.

For details, refer to the floor

mat retention clip installation

instructions supplied with the

clips.

499

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

CAUTION

nBefore driving

lCheck that the floor mat is securely

fixed in the right place with all the pro-

vided retaining hooks (clips). Be espe-

cially careful to perform this check after

cleaning the floor.

lWith the engine stopped and the shift

lever in P, fully depress each pedal to

the floor to make sure it does not inter-

fere with the floor mat.

500

3-8. Other interior features

Luggage compartment features

nDeck hooks

Deck hooks are provided for

securing loose items.

501

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

nCargo net hooks (CrewMax models only)

To hang the cargo net, use the

cargo net hooks.

The cargo net itself is not

included as original equipment.

nShopping bag hooks (CrewMax models only)

To hang shopping bags, use

the shopping bag hooks.

502

3-8. Other interior features

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to the cargo net hooks and shopping bag hooks

lAvoid hanging heavy loads on the cargo net hooks or shopping bag hooks.

lAvoid hanging things other than the cargo net when using the shopping

bag hooks as cargo net hooks.

503

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

Garage door opener∗

The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufac-

tured under license from HomeLink®.

Programming the HomeLink® (for U.S.A. owners)

The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons

which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the

programming method below appropriate for the device.

Indicator

Buttons

∗: If equipped

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage

doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, secu-

rity systems, and other devices.

504

3-8. Other interior features

nProgramming the HomeLink®

Point the remote control trans-

mitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25

to 75 mm) from the HomeLink®

control buttons.

Keep the indicator on the

HomeLink® in view while pro-

gramming.

Press and hold down one of the

buttons on the HomeLink® and

the button on the transmitter.

When the indicator on the

HomeLink® changes from a slow

to a rapid flash, you can release

both buttons.

If the HomeLink® indicator comes

on but does not flash, or flashes

rapidly for 2 seconds and remains

lit, the HomeLink® button is

already programmed. Use the

other buttons or follow the

“Reprogramming a HomeLink®

button” instructions. (→P. 507)

505

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

Test the operation of the

HomeLink® by pressing the

newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door

opener, check to see if the garage

door opens and closes. If the

garage door does not operate,

see if your garage transmitter is

of the Rolling Code type. Press

and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button. The garage

door has the rolling code feature

if the indicator (on the

HomeLink®) flashes rapidly for 2

seconds and then remains lit. If

your transmitter is the Rolling

Code type, proceed to the head-

ing “Programming a rolling code

system”.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of

the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

nProgramming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the

heading “Programming the HomeLink®” before proceeding with the

steps listed below.

Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door

opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may

vary by brand of garage door opener.

Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener

for the location of the training button.

Press the training button.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3

below.

506

3-8. Other interior features

Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink® button

for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The

garage door may open.

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If

the door does not open, press and release the button a third time.

This third press and release will complete the programming process

by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recog-

nize the HomeLink® transceiver and operate the garage door.

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code sys-

tem for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

nProgramming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming

all devices in the Canadian market

Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the

surface of the HomeLink®.

Keep the indicator on the HomeLink® in view while programming.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote

control button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.

When the indicator on the HomeLink® compatible transceiver

start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.

Test the operation of the HomeLink® by pressing the newly

programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates

correctly.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of

the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

nProgramming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home

door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for

assistance.

507

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

nReprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be

reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the programming

instructions.

Operating the HomeLink®

Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator

on the HomeLink® transceiver should turn on.

The HomeLink® continues to send a signal for a maximum of 20 seconds

as long as the button is pressed.

Reprogramming a HomeLink® button

Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. After 20 seconds, the

HomeLink® indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the

HomeLink® button and then follow the “Programming HomeLink® (for

U.S.A. owners)” instructions. (→P. 503)

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)

Press and hold down the 2 out-

side buttons for 10 seconds until

the indicator flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to

erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink® memory.

508

3-8. Other interior features

nBefore programming

lInstall a new battery in the remote control transmitter.

lThe battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away

from the HomeLink®.

nCertification for the garage door opener

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

• Vehicles with rear view monitor system

FCC ID: NZLGHSHL4

• Vehicles without rear view monitor system

FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

nWhen support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

509

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

CAUTION

nWhen programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door may operate, so ensure that people and objects are out of

danger to prevent potential harm.

nConforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink® Compatible Transceiver with any garage door

opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by

federal safety standards.

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A

door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious

injury.

510

3-8. Other interior features

Compass∗

∗: If equipped

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in

which the vehicle is heading.

nOperation

Type A

To turn the compass on or off,

press the switch.

Type B

511

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

Calibrating the compass

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by

the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according

to the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will

deviate.

To obtain higher precision or accurate calibration, refer to the following.

nDisplays and directions

Display Direction

NNorth

NE Northeast

EEast

SE Southeast

S South

SW Southwest

WWest

NW Northwest

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8

512

3-8. Other interior features

nDeviation calibration

Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.

Press the switch until a number (1 to 15) appears on the com-

pass display.

Type A

Type B

Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the

number of the zone where you are.

If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the

calibration is complete.

513

3-8. Other interior features

Interior and exterior features

nCircling calibration

When “C” appears on the dis-

play, drive the vehicle at 5 mph

(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a

direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to

drive in a circle, drive around the

block until the direction is dis-

played.

nConditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

lThe vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

lThe vehicle is on an inclined surface.

lThe vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to

interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking

lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near

an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

lThe vehicle has become magnetized.

(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

lThe battery has been disconnected.

lA door is open.

CAUTION

nWhile driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle

is stopped.

nWhen doing the circling calibration

Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the

neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling

calibration.

514

3-8. Other interior features

NOTICE

nTo avoid the compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.

Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.

nTo ensure normal operation of the compass

lDo not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

lDuring calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power win-

dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

516

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

nAutomatic car washes

lBefore washing the vehicle, do the following.

• Fold the mirrors back.

• Remove the antenna.

lBrushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface

and harm your vehicle’s paint.

nHigh pressure car washes

Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of

the windows. Before entering an automatic car wash, check that the fuel filler

door on your vehicle is closed properly.

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime

condition.

lWorking from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle

body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any

dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a

chamois.

lFor hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-

oughly with water.

lWipe away any water.

lWax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle

body is cool.

517

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

nAluminum wheels (if equipped)

lRemove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use

hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical

cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

lDo not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after

driving for long distance in the hot weather.

lWash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

nBumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

CAUTION

nCaution about the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled

sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

NOTICE

nTo prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-

nents (aluminum wheels etc.)

lWash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,

iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

lIf the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

lTo prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place

with low humidity when storing the wheels.

518

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE

nCleaning the exterior lights

lWash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

lDo not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

nAntenna installation and removal precautions

lBefore driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.

lWhen the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car

wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,

before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.

519

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and

keep it in top condition:

nProtecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-

faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

nCleaning the leather areas

lRemove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

lWipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with

diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-

gent.

lWring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

lWipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-

ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and venti-

lated area.

nSynthetic leather areas

lRemove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

lApply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a

sponge or soft cloth.

lAllow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the

dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

520

4-1. Maintenance and care

nCaring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year

to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

nShampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a

sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply

water. Excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as pos-

sible.

nSeat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also

check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION

nWater in the vehicle

lDo not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch

fire.

lDo not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(→P. 120)

Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function

properly, resulting in death or severe injury.

nCleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off

the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

521

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

NOTICE

nCleaning detergents

lDo not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or

alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor

the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

lDo not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other

interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

nPreventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of

leather surfaces.

lRemove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

lDo not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

lDo not place items made of vinyl or plastic, or that contain wax on the

upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior

heats up significantly.

nWater on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes

into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and

may also cause the body to rust.

nCleaning the inside of the back window (vehicles with the back window

defogger)

lDo not use glass cleaner to clean the back window, as this may cause

damage to the back window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened

with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in

strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

lBe careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

522

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

nRepair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure

performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or

if a repair shop other than Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-

ranty coverage.

Flex-fuel vehicles: Flex-fuel vehicles use special parts made exclusively for

flex-fuel vehicles. When servicing or repairing your vehicles, use genuine

Toyota parts made exclusively for your flex-fuel vehicle.

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular

maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform

regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.

nGeneral maintenance

Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by your-

self or by a Toyota dealer.

nScheduled maintenance

Should be performed at specified intervals according to the

maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

nDo-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-

ranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s

Warranty Information Booklet”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

523

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

nAllow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

lToyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date

with the latest service information. They are well informed about the

operations of all systems on your vehicle.

lKeep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has

been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise

while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly

take care of it.

CAUTION

nWarning in handling of battery

lEngine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile

components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a

well ventilated area.

lOils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by

component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-

nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid

exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

lBattery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead

compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands

after handling. (→P. 543)

524

4-2. Maintenance

General maintenance

Engine compartment

Items Check points

Battery Maintenance-free. (→P. 543)

Brake fluid At the correct level? (→P. 540)

Engine coolant At the correct level? (→P. 539)

Engine oil At the correct level? (→P. 535)

Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds?

Power steering fluid At the correct level? (→P. 542)

Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter?

(→P. 540)

Washer fluid At the correct level? (→P. 545)

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-

formed at the intervals specified in the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that

any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your

Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

525

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

Vehicle interior

Items Check points

Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven

pedal effort or catching)?

Automatic transmission “Park”

mechanism

• Can the vehicle be held securely

on an incline with the shift lever in

Brake pedal

• Moves smoothly?

• Does it have appropriate clear-

ance and correct amount of free

play?

Brakes

• Not pull to one side when

applied?

• Loss of brake effectiveness?

• Spongy feeling brake pedal?

• Pedal almost touches floor?

Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock

securely?

Indicators/buzzers • Function properly?

Lights • Do all the lights come on?

• Headlights aimed correctly?

Parking brake

• Moves smoothly?

• Can hold the vehicle securely on

an incline?

Seat belts

• Does the seat belt system oper-

ate smoothly?

• Are the belts undamaged?

Seats • Do the seat controls operate

properly?

Steering wheel

• Moves smoothly?

• Has correct free play?

• No strange noises?

526

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points

Doors • Operate smoothly?

Engine hood • The lock system works properly?

Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after park-

ing?

Tire

• Inflation pressure is correct?

• Tire surfaces not worn or dam-

aged?

• Tires rotated according to the

maintenance schedule?

• Wheel nuts are not loose?

CAUTION

nIf the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-

forming maintenance checks.

527

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which

include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-

tors the operation of the emission control system.

nIf the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere

in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/

M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer

to service the vehicle.

nYour vehicle may not pass the I/M test:

lWhen the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are

erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes

may not be completely set.

lWhen the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-

function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

nWhen the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several

driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the

vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

nIf your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

528

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct

procedures as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools

Battery condition (→P. 543)

•Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level (→P. 540)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE

J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

Engine coolant level (→P. 539)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene

glycol based non-silicate, non-

amine, non-nitrite and non-borate

coolant with long-life hybrid

organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

is pre-mixed with 50% coolant

and 50% deionized water.

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

is pre-mixed with 55% coolant

and 45% deionized water.

Engine oil level (→P. 535)

• Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or

equivalent

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding oil)

Fuses (→P. 565) • Fuse with same amperage rating

as original

529

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Items Parts and tools

Light bulbs (→P. 576)

• Bulb with same number and watt-

age rating as original

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Flathead screwdriver

Power steering fluid level

(→P. 542)

• Automatic transmission fluid

DEXRON® II or III

• Rag or paper towel

Radiator and condenser

(→P. 540) ⎯

Tire inflation pressure (→P. 554) • Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

Washer fluid (→P. 545)

• Water

• Washer fluid containing antifreeze

(for winter use)

530

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may

move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death

or serious injury observe the following precautions.

nWhen working on the engine compartment

lKeep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine

drive belt.

lBe careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right

after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

lDo not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the

engine compartment.

lDo not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-

tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

lBe extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

lTake care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage

painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with

clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

nWhen working near the cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is off.

With the engine switch on, the cooling fan may automatically start to run if

the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.

nSafety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from

getting in the eyes.

531

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

NOTICE

nIf you remove the air cleaner

Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due

to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compart-

ment.

nIf the brake fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads

wear or when the brake fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

532

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood

CAUTION

nPre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion

and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood lock release

lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Pull up the hood catch lever

and lift the hood.

533

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Engine compartment

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Washer fluid tank (→P. 545)

Engine oil level dipstick

(→P. 535)

Engine coolant reservoir

(→P. 539)

Engine oil filler cap

(→P. 536)

Brake fluid reservoir

(→P. 540)

Fuse box (→P. 565)

Battery (→P. 543)

Radiator (→P. 540)

Condenser (→P. 540)

Power steering fluid reservoir

(→P. 542)

534

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) and 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engines

Washer fluid tank (→P. 545)

Engine oil level dipstick

(→P. 535)

Engine coolant reservoir

(→P. 539)

Engine oil filler cap

(→P. 536)

Brake fluid reservoir

(→P. 540)

Fuse box (→P. 565)

Battery (→P. 543)

Radiator (→P. 540)

Condenser (→P. 540)

Power steering fluid reservoir

(→P. 542)

535

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil

level on the dipstick.

nChecking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine,

wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bot-

tom of the engine.

Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) and 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engines

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check

the oil level.

536

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

Low

Full

nAdding engine oil

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

If the oil level is below or near

the low level mark, add engine

oil of the same type as already in

the engine.

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) and 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engines

If the oil level is below or near

the low level mark, add engine

oil of the same type as already in

the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before

adding oil.

Engine oil selection →P. 657

Items Clean funnel

537

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Remove the oil filler cap, turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly.

Checking the dipstick.

Reinstall the filler cap, turning it clockwise.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level between low and

full on the dipstick is indicated as follows:

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)

nEngine oil consumption

lThe amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the

quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

lMore oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and

frequent acceleration and deceleration.

lA new engine consumes more oil.

lWhen judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil

may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-

rately.

nAfter changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:

Turn the engine switch off with the trip meter A reading shown.

While pressing the trip meter reset button (→P. 192, 194), turn the

engine switch on.

Without multi-information display

Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays

000000.

With multi-information display

Continue to press and hold the button until “MAINT REQD RESET

MODE COMPLETE” appears on the multi-information display.

538

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

nUsed engine oil

lUsed engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should

be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine

oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

lDispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do

not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the

ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for

information concerning recycling or disposal.

lDo not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

nTo prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

nWhen replacing the engine oil

lBe careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

lAvoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.

lCheck the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

lBe sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

539

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW

lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

FULL

LOW

If the level is on or below the

LOW line, add coolant up to the

FULL line.

nIf the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock

and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer pressure test the cap and

check for leaks in the cooling system.

nCoolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene

glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with

long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C])

Canada:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44°F [-42°C])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

nWhen the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the

cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.

540

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of

their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

Brake fluid

nChecking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be

between the MAX and MIN lines

on the reservoir.

NOTICE

nWhen adding engine coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of

water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion

protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

nIf you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

CAUTION

nWhen the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and may cause

burns.

541

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

nAdding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Items Rag or paper towel

nBrake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking effi-

ciency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION

nWhen filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage

painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean

water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

nIf the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads

wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

nIf you spill fluid

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

542

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Power steering fluid

nFluid level

The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.

Full (when cold)

Add fluid (when cold)

Full (when hot)

Add fluid (when hot)

Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20

minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid

temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C])

Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room tem-

perature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C])

nChecking the fluid level

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

Clean all dirt off the reservoir.

Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinstall and remove the reservoir cap again.

Check the fluid level.

Fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III

Items Rag or paper towel

CAUTION

nChecking the fluid level

Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.

543

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Battery

nBattery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that

there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Ter mi nal s

Hold-down clamp

NOTICE

nWhen adding fluid

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.

nAfter replacing the reservoir cap

Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or

damage.

nBefore recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable

and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

lIf recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-

nect the ground cable.

lMake sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and

disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

544

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

nChemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce

hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death

or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near bat-

tery:

lDo not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

lDo not smoke or light a match near the battery.

lAvoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

lNever inhale or swallow electrolyte.

lWear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

lKeep children away from the battery.

nWhere to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a

garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

nHow to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5A or less).

The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

nEmergency measures regarding electrolyte

lIf electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or

cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

lIf electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical

attention immediately.

lIf electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-

ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

lIf you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical

attention immediately.

545

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Washer fluid

Add washer fluid in the following situations.

lAny washer does not work.

lThe low washer fluid warning light comes on. (if equipped)

lThe warning message appears on the multi-information display. (if

equipped)

Open the lid.

Add washer fluid.

NOTICE

nWhen recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

546

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

nWhen refilling the washer fluid

Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the

washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

nDo not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

nDiluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.

547

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-

ules and treadwear.

nChecking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear

indicators is shown by the

“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc.,

molded on the sidewall of

each tire.

Check spare tire condition

and inflation pressure if not

rotated.

nTire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and

extend tire life, Toyota recom-

mends that tire rotation is

carried out at the same inter-

val as tire inspection.

Do not fail to initialize the tire

pressure warning system

after tire rotation.

nThe tire pressure warning system

Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that

uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low

tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (→P. 601)

Front

548

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,

new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be regis-

tered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning

system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and trans-

mitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (→P. 549)

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

nThe tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the fol-

lowing circumstances:

lWhen rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear

tire inflation pressures.

lWhen changing the tire size.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current

tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.

nHow to initialize the tire pressure warning system

Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch off.

While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire infla-

tion pressure level. (→P. 665)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire

inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will

operate based on this pressure level.

Turn the engine switch to the ON position.

549

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Push and hold the tire pressure

warning reset switch until the

tire pressure warning light blinks

slowly 3 times.

Wait for several minutes with the engine switch on, and then

turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a

unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your

Toyota dealer.

nWhen to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

lYou have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage

lA tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the

size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

550

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

nReplacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not

registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After

driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on

after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.

nTire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even

if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

nIf the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

nMaximum load of tire

Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of

the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

nTire types

1 Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway

driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same

traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for

driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered

roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When

installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2 All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to

be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use

year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction

performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,

all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance

compared with summer tires in highway driving.

For the GAWR, see the Certification

Label. For the maximum load of the

tire, see the load limit at maximum cold

tire inflation pressure mentioned on the

sidewall of the tire. (→ P. 672)

551

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

3Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using

snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-

struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your

vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow

tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without

first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires

should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 261)

nInitializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified

level.

nIf you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the speci-

fied level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.

nWhen the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has

failed

Initialization can be completed in several minutes. However, in the fol-

lowing cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will

not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure

settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota

dealer.

lWhen operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres-

sure warning light does not flash 3 times.

lAfter carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warn-

ing light blinks for 1 minute and then stays on after driving for about

20 minutes.

nRoutine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation

pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of

your routine of daily vehicle checks.

552

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

nTire pressure warning system certification

FCC ID: GQ4-32T

FCC ID: GQ4-37R

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-

ble for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may

not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION

nWhen inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so

may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous han-

dling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

lDo not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do

not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

lDo not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

lDo not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply

tires).

lDo not mix summer, all season and winter tires.

553

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

CAUTION

nWhen inspecting or replacing tires

lDo not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

lDo not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

nWhen initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting

the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pres-

sure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is

low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

NOTICE

nRepairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,

transmitters and tire valve caps

lWhen removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled cor-

rectly.

lWhen replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than

those specified. The cap may become stuck.

nTo avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

nDriving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-

holes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing

the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may

cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels

and body.

nIf tire inflation pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

554

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure

nTire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is dis-

played on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 672)

555

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

nInspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.

If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended

levels, adjust inflate the tire.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to

lower.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement

and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check

for leakage.

Reinstall the tire valve cap.

556

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

nTire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire pressure every two weeks, or at least once a

month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

nEffects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

lReduced fuel efficiency

lReduced driving comfort and tire life

lReduced safety

lDamage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

nInstructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

lCheck only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been

driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold

tire inflation pressure reading.

lAlways use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla-

tion pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride

and handling.

lDo not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal

for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

lNever exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle

is balanced.

557

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

CAUTION

nProper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident

causing death or serious injury.

lExcessive wear

lUneven wear

lPoor handling

lPossibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

lPoor sealing of the tire bead

lWheel deformation and/or tire separation

lA greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

nWhen inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and

cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have

been lost, replace them as soon as possible.

558

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be

replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of

handling control.

nWheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that

they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,

rim width, and inset*.

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using:

lWheels of different sizes or types

lUsed wheels

lBent wheels that have been straightened

nWheel precautions

lUse only Toyota wheel nuts and wrench designed for use with

your aluminum wheels.

lWhen rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the

wheel nuts are still tight after driving 100 miles (160 km).

lBe careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using

tire chains.

lUse only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a

plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

559

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

nWhen replacing wheels

The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters (except for spare tire) that allow the tire pressure

warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire

inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P. 548)

CAUTION

nWhen replacing wheels

lDo not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in

the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

lNever use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a

tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-

ous injury.

NOTICE

nReplacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

lBecause tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your

Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to

purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your

Toyota dealer.

lEnsure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly

with non-genuine wheels.

560

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to

maintain air conditioning efficiency.

nRemoval method

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the glove box.

Remove the tray.

Remove the cover by sliding

up while pulling toward you.

561

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Remove the filter cover.

Pull the filter out of the filter

outlet.

nCleaning method

If the filter is dirty, clean by

blowing compressed air

through the filter from the

downward side.

Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)

from the filter and blow for

approximately 2 minutes at

72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2

or bar).

If it is not available, have

the filter cleaned by your

Toyota dealer.

562

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

nChecking interval

Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the mainte-

nance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more fre-

quent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled

maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

nIf air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to the system

lWhen using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always

installed.

lWhen cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.

nReplacement method

Remove the air conditioning

filter and replace it with a new

one.

The “↑UP” marks shown on the

filter should be pointing up.

563

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Wireless remote control battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

nYou will need the following items:

Lithium battery CR2032

nReplacing the battery

Remove the cover using a

coin protected with tape etc.

Remove the discharged trans-

mitter battery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

564

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

nIf the wireless remote control battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

lThe wireless remote control will not function properly.

lThe operational range is reduced.

nUse a CR2032 lithium battery

lBatteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera

stores.

lReplace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your

Toyota dealer.

lDispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

CAUTION

nRemoved battery and other parts

Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,

they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious

injury.

NOTICE

nFor normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

lAlways work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

lDo not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.

lDo not bend either of the battery terminals.

565

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have

blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the engine switch off.

The fuses are located in the following places. To check the

fuses, follow the instructions below.

Engine compartment

Push the tab in and lift the lid

off.

Under the instrument panel

Remove the lid.

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-

ings” (→P. 568) for details about which fuse to check.

566

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Remove the fuse with the pull-

out tool.

567

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an

appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be

found on the fuse box lid.

Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an

appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be

found on the fuse box lid.

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact your Toyota dealer.

568

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

nEngine compartment

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 A/F 15 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

2 HORN 10 A Horn

3 EFI NO.1 25 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

4 IG2 MAIN 30 A INJ, MET, IGN fuses

5 DEICER 20 A Front windshield wiper de-icer

6 TOW TAIL 30 A Trailer lights (tail lights)

7 POWER NO.4 25 A Power windows

8 POWER NO.2 30 A Power back windows

9 FOG 15 A Front fog lights

569

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

10 STOP 15 A

Stop lights, high mounted stop-

light, vehicle stability control sys-

tem, anti-lock brake system, shift

lock system, multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel

injection system, towing converter

11 TOW BRK 30 A Trailer brake controller

12 IMB 7.5 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

13 AM2 7.5 A Starting system

14 TOWING 30 A Towing converter

15 AI PMP HTR 10 A Air injection system

16 ALT-S 5 A Charging system

17 TURN-HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights, emergency

flashers, towing converter

18 F/PMP 15 A No circuit

19 ETCS 10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system, electric throttle control sys-

tem

20 MET-B 5 A Gauges and meters

21 AMP 30 A

Audio system, rear view monitor,

navigation system, rear seat enter-

tainment system

22 RAD NO.1 15 A

Audio system, rear view monitor,

navigation system, rear seat enter-

tainment system

Fuse Ampere Circuit

570

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

23 ECU-B1 7.5 A

Multiplex communication system,

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system, auto anti-glare inside rear

view mirror, power outlets, power

front driver’s seat, power tilt and

power telescopic

24 DOME 7.5 A

Interior lights, personal lights, van-

ity lights, engine switch light, foot

light, accessory meter

25 HEAD LH 15 A Left-hand headlight

(high beam)

26 HEAD LL 15 A Left-hand headlight

(low beam)

27 INJ 10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system, ignition system

28 MET 7.5 A Gauges and meters

29 IGN 10 A

SRS airbag system, multiport fuel

injection system/sequential multi-

port fuel injection system, cruise

control system

30 HEAD RH 15 A Right-hand headlight

(high beam)

31 HEAD RL 15 A Right-hand headlight

(low beam)

32 EFI NO.2 10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system, leak detection pump

33 DEF I/UP 5 A No circuit

34 SPARE 5 A Spare fuse

35 SPARE 15 A Spare fuse

36 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse

Fuse Ampere Circuit

571

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

*: Replace the fuse with one of the same ampere rating as the original.

37 DEFOG 40 A Back window defogger

38 SUB BATT 40 A Trailer towing

39 ABS1 50 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-

bility control system

40 ABS2 40 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-

bility control system

41 ST 30 A Starting system

42 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system

43 LH-J/B 150 A

AM1, TAIL, PANEL, ACC, CIG, LH-

IG, 4WD, ECU-IG No.1, BK/UP LP,

SEAT-HTR, A/C IG, ECU-IG No.2,

WSH, WIPER, OBD, A/C, TI&TE,

FR P/SEAT RH, MIR, DR/LCK, FR

P/SEAT LH, CARGO LP, PWR

OUTLET, POWER No.1 fuses

44 ALT

180 A*LH-J/B, HTR, SUB BATT, TOW

BRK, STOP, FOG, TOW TAIL,

DEICER fuses

140 A*

45 A/PUMP NO.1 50 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

46 A/PUMP NO.2 50 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

47 MAIN 40 A HEAD LL, HEAD RL,

HEAD LH, HEAD RH fuses

Fuse Ampere Circuit

572

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

nUnder the instrument panel

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 INVERTER 15 A Power outlet (115V)

2 FR P/SEAT LH 30 A Power front driver’s seat

3 DR/LCK 25 A Multiplex communication system

4 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system

5 PWR OUTLET 15 A Power outlets

6 CARGO LP 7.5 A Cargo lamp

7 AM1 7.5 A Shift lock system, starting system

8 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system

9 MIR 15 A Outside rear view mirror control,

outside rear view mirror heaters

10 POWER No.3 20 A Power windows

11 FR P/SEAT RH 30 A Power front passenger seat

12 TI&TE 15 A Power tilt and power telescopic

13 S/ROOF 25 A Electric moon roof

573

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

14 ECU-IG No.1 7.5 A

Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-

bility control system, multiplex com-

munication system, intuitive

parking assist system, power front

driver’s seat, power tilt and power

telescopic, shift lock, tire pressure

warning system, accessory meter,

trailer towing, power outlet, electric

moon roof

15 LH-IG 7.5 A

Back-up lights, charging system,

gauges and meters, turn signal

lights, air conditioning system, seat

heaters, back window defogger

16 4WD 20 A Four-wheel drive control system

17 WSH 20 A Window washer

18 WIPER 30 A Wiper and washer

19 ECU-IG No.2 7.5 A Multiplex communication system,

power steering

20 TAIL 15 A Tail lights, trailer lights (tail lights),

parking lights, outer foot lights

21 A/C IG 10 A Air conditioning system

22 TOW BK/UP 7.5 A Trailer lights

23 SEAT-HTR 20 A Seat heaters or heater and venti-

lated seats

24 PANEL 7.5 A

Instrument panel lights, glove box

light, accessory meter, audio sys-

tem, rear view monitor, navigation

system, rear seat entertainment

system, gauges and meters, air

conditioning system

Fuse Ampere Circuit

574

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

25 ACC 7.5 A

Accessory meter, audio system,

rear seat entertainment system,

rear view monitor, navigation sys-

tem, back-up lights, trailer lights

(back-up lights), multiplex commu-

nication system, power outlet, out-

side rear view mirror

26 BK/UP LP 10 A Back-up light, gauges and meters

27 POWER No.1 30 A Power windows, power back win-

dow

nAfter a fuse is replaced

lIf the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb

may need replacement. (→P. 576)

lIf the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

nIf there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.

CAUTION

nTo prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.

lNever use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any

other object in place of a fuse.

lAlways use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

lDo not modify the fuse or the fuse box.

Fuse Ampere Circuit

575

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

NOTICE

nBefore replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toy-

ota dealer as soon as possible.

576

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of

replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb

replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your

Toyota dealer.

nPrepare a replacement light bulb.

Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (→P. 667)

nFront bulb locations

Headlight low

beam

Front side marker

lights

Headlight

high beam

Front fog lights

(if equipped)

Front turn signal/parking

lights/daytime running

lights (if equipped)

577

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Replacing light bulbs

nHeadlight high beam

Unplug the connector while

depressing the lock release.

nRear bulb locations

High mounted stoplight

and cargo lamps

License plate lights

Back-up lights

Rear turn

signal lights

Stop/tail and rear

side marker lights

578

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

nHeadlight low beam

Unplug the connector while

depressing the lock release.

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

579

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

nFront turn signal/parking lights/daytime running lights (if

equipped)

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

Remove the light bulb.

580

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

nFront side marker lights

Remove the fender liner clip.

Partly remove the fender liner

and turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

581

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Remove the light bulb.

nFront fog lights (if equipped)

Remove the bolts and partly

remove the fender liner.

Turn the bulb counterclockwise.

582

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Unplug the connector while

depressing the lock release.

nStop/tail and rear side marker lights, rear turn signal lights

and back-up lights

Remove the bolts and rear com-

bination assembly.

Turn the bulb bases counter-

clockwise.

Stop/tail and rear side marker

light

Rear turn signal light

Back-up light

583

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Remove the light bulb.

Stop/tail and rear side marker

light

Rear turn signal light

Back-up light

nHigh mounted stoplight and cargo lamps

Remove the screws and cover.

Remove the light bulb.

High mounted stoplight

Cargo lamps

584

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

nLicense plate lights

Remove the screw and light unit.

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

Remove the light bulb.

585

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

nLights other than the above

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by

your Toyota dealer.

• Outer foot light (if equipped)

• Side turn signal light (if equipped)

nCondensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does

not indicate a malfunction.

lLarge drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

lWater has built up inside the headlight.

nLED side turn signal lights

The side turn signal light consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs

burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

nInstalling the fender liner clips

Insert the clip.

586

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

nReplacing light bulbs

lTurn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately

after turning off the headlights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

lDo not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the

bulb by the plastic or metal portion.

If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

lFully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so

may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This

may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

nTo prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

588

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

NOTICE

nTo prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the

engine is not running.

Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is

involved in an accident.

Press the switch to flash all

the turn signal lights. To turn

them off, press the switch

once again.

When trouble arises

589

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact

your Toyota dealer before towing.

lThe engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

lThe vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be

temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency

towing eyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for

short distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The

vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in

good condition.

Type A

Towing eyelet

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by

your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type

truck or a flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-

vincial and local laws.

The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition.

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

590

5-1. Essential information

Type B

Towing eyelet

nEmergency towing procedure

The engine switch must be in the ACC (engine off) or the ON

(engine running) position.

4WD models: Put the front-wheel drive control switch in 2WD.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Release the parking brake.

CAUTION

nCaution while towing

lUse extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive

stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. Always

use caution for the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.

lIf the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering

will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

When trouble arises

591

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a sling-type truck

NOTICE

nTo prevent serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the four wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

nEmergency towing eyelet precautions

lBefore emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not broken or damaged

and that the installation bolts are not loose.

lFasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet.

lDo not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force.

lTo avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or at a vertical

angle. Always pull straight ahead.

NOTICE

nTo prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

592

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the front

Use a towing dolly under the rear

wheels.

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the rear

2WD models

Turn the engine switch to the

ACC position.

NOTICE

nTo prevent serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground.

When trouble arises

593

5-1. Essential information

4WD models

We recommend the use of a tow-

ing dolly under the front wheels.

When not using a towing dolly,

turn the engine switch to the ACC

position, shift the shift lever to N

and put the front wheel drive con-

trol switch in 2WD.

Using a flat bed truck

If your Toyota is transported by a

flat bed truck, it should be tied

down at the locations shown in

the illustration.

NOTICE

nTo prevent damage to the vehicle

lDo not tow the vehicle with the key removed or in the LOCK position.

The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel

straight.

lWhen raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at

the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the

vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

Front

594

5-1. Essential information

If you use chains or cables to tie

down your vehicle, the angles

indicated by triangles must be

45°.

Do not overly tighten the tie

downs or the vehicle may be

damaged.

Apply the parking brake firmly.

When trouble arises

595

5-1. Essential information

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably

needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

nVisible symptoms

lFluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

lFlat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

lEngine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points

higher than normal

lVoltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal

(if equipped)

lEngine oil pressure gauge continually points lower than nor-

mal (if equipped)

lAutomatic transmission fluid temperature gauge needle con-

tinually points higher than normal (if equipped)

nAudible symptoms

lChanges in exhaust sound

lExcessive tire squeal when cornering

lStrange noises related to the suspension system

lPinging or other noises related to the engine

nOperational symptoms

lEngine missing, stumbling or running rough

lAppreciable loss of power

lVehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

lVehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

lLoss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost

touches the floor

596

5-1. Essential information

Fuel pump shut off system

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is

activated.

Turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

nBefore starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been

damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an air-

bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops sup-

plying fuel to the engine.

When trouble arises

597

5-1. Essential information

Event data recorder

In a crash or a near car crash event

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a

near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the follow-

ing information:

lEngine speed

lWhether the brake pedal was applied or not

lVehicle speed

lTo what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

lPosition of the transmission shift lever

lWhether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not

lDriver’s seat position

lSRS airbag deployment data

lSRS airbag system diagnostic data

lFront passenger’s occupant classification

The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of

improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders,

the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between

passengers.

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects

of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining

optimal vehicle performance.

Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event

data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car

crash event.

598

5-1. Essential information

Disclosure of the data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party

except when:

lAn agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for

a leased vehicle) is obtained

lOfficially requested by the police or other authorities

lUsed as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

lOrdered by a court of law

However, if necessary Toyota will:

lUse the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance

lDisclose the data to a third party for research purposes without dis-

closing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed

necessary

lDisclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification informa-

tion to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes

When trouble arises

599

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-

tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the

vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehi-

cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is

not released. If the light turns off after the parking

brake is fully released, the system is operating nor-

mally.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging sys-

tem.

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn

on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does

not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

600

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

*1: Vehicles without tachometer

*2: The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed

to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the engine

oil level dipstick.

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to

the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Warning light Warning light/Details

*1 Low engine oil pressure warning light

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low*2.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system;

• The electronic automatic transmission control sys-

tem; or

• The emission control system.

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system;

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system.

When trouble arises

601

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning light turns off.

Slip indicator

The indicator comes on to indicate a malfunction in:

• The VSC;

• The TRAC;

• The A-TRAC or

• The AUTO LSD system.

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warn-

ing light

• Comes on: Indicates that the automatic transmission

fluid temperature is too high.

• Flashes: Indicates a malfunction in the automatic

transmission system

(if equipped)

Power steering warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the variable flow control

power steering system.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

Open door warning light

(warning buzzer)*1

Indicates that a door is

not fully closed.

Check that all doors

are closed.

(On the instrument

cluster)

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light

(warning buzzer)*2

Warns the driver to fas-

ten his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Warning light Warning light/Details

602

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

(On the center panel)

Front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

(warning buzzer)*3

Warns the right front pas-

senger to fasten his/her

seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Tire pressure warning

light

• When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pres-

sure.

Adjust the tire

inflation pressure.

• When the light comes on

after blinking for 1

minute: Malfunction in

the tire pressure warning

system.

Have the system

checked by your

Toyota dealer.

Low fuel level warning

light

Low level of fuel.

Refuel the vehicle.

*4 Low washer fluid warn-

ing light

Low level of washer fluid.

Fill the tank.

(U.S.A.)

Engine oil replacement

reminder light

• Illuminates for about 3

seconds and then flashes

for about 12 seconds: Indi-

cates that the engine oil is

scheduled to be changed.

Check the engine oil,

and change if neces-

sary.

• Comes on and remains:

Indicates that the engine

oil should be changed.

Check and change the

engine oil.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

When trouble arises

603

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

*1: Open door warning buzzer:

The buzzer sounds to indicate that any door is opened (with the vehicle hav-

ing reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])

*2: Driver’s seat belt reminder:

The driver’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat

belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the ON or START

position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle has reached a

speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds intermittently for 10

seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a

different tone for 20 more seconds.

*3: Front passenger’s seat belt reminder:

The front passenger’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the right front pas-

senger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermit-

tently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12

mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound

in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

*4: Vehicles without multi-information display

*5: Vehicles with multi-information display

Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the

warning light comes on

and flashes to indicate

that the master warning

system has detected a

malfunction.

→P. 608

nFour-wheel drive system warning buzzer

The buzzer indicated that the transfer mode is not selected correctly.

nKey reminder buzzer

The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed (with the engine

switch in the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened).

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

604

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

nOpen moon roof reminder buzzer

The buzzer indicate that the moon roof is still opened (with the engine switch

in the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened).

nIf the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

lIs your vehicle low on gas?

If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately.

lIs the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after taking several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

nFront passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder

If luggage or other load is placed on the right front passenger seat, depend-

ing on its weight, the reminder light to flash and buzzer to sound.

nWhen the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.

Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire

pressure warning light.

nThe tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such

as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temper-

ature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the

warning light (after several minutes).

nWhen a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will

not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the temporary spare

tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust

the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn

off after several minutes.

When trouble arises

605

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

nIf the tire pressure warning system is inoperative

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi-

tions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

lIf tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters are used.

lIf the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is

not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-

tions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

lIf electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies

are nearby.

lIf a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.

lIf a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

lIf there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the

wheels or wheel housings.

lIf non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota

wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with

some types of tires.)

lIf tire chains are used.

nIf the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1

minute frequently

If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute fre-

quently when the engine switch is turned to the ON position, have it

checked by your Toyota dealer.

nAfter changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (→P. 537)

nCustomization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

The vehicle speed linked front passenger’s seat belt reminder buzzer can be

disabled. (Customizable features →P. 683)

606

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

nIf the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could

cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

lStop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire

inflation pressure immediately.

lIf the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-

sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.

If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired

by the nearest Toyota dealer.

lAvoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,

you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

nIf a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

nMaintenance of the tire

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the

vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ-

ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that

illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,

when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and

inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may

affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

When trouble arises

607

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-

stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire

pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning

system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat-

ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi-

cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure

warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-

nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as

long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-

nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-

ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires

or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning

system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-

sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-

nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to

continue to function properly.

NOTICE

nPrecaution when installing a different tire

When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pres-

sure warning system may not operate properly.

608

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display)

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehi-

cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning message Details

(Flashing)

Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is

too high

A buzzer also sounds.

Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid

temperature is too high

A buzzer also sounds and the automatic transmis-

sion fluid temperature warning light comes on.

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and

perform the following actions:

Master warning light

The master warning light also

comes on or flashes in order to

indicate that a message is cur-

rently being displayed on the

multi-information display.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the fol-

lowing actions, contact your Toyota dealer.

When trouble arises

609

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning light turns off.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Indicates that one or

more of the doors is not

fully closed.

The system also indi-

cates which doors are

not fully closed.

flashes and a

buzzer sounds to indi-

cate that one or more of

the doors is not fully

closed (with the vehicle

having reached a speed

of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Open door warning light

also comes on.

Make sure that all of

the doors are closed.

(Flashing)

Indicates that the park-

ing brake is still

engaged with the vehicle

having reached a speed

of more than 3 mph (5

km/h).

A buzzer also sounds

intermittently.

Release the parking

brake.

Indicates that the

washer fluid level is low.

A buzzer also sounds.

Add washer fluid.

610

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

(U.S.A. only)

Indicates that the engine

oil is scheduled to be

changed.

A buzzer also sounds.

Check the engine oil,

and change if neces-

sary.

Comes on approxi-

mately 4500 miles (7200

km) after the engine oil

is changed. (The indica-

tor will not work prop-

erly unless the oil

maintenance data has

been reset).

(U.S.A. only)

Indicates that the engine

oil should be changed.

A buzzer also sounds.

Check and change the

engine oil.

Comes on approxi-

mately 5000 miles (8000

km) after the engine oil

is changed (and the oil

maintenance data has

been reset).

Indicates that the fuel

level is low.

A buzzer also sounds

and the low fuel level

warning light comes on.

Fill up the tank as soon

as possible.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

When trouble arises

611

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

nAfter changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (→P. 537)

612

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

nBefore jacking up the vehicle

lStop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

lSet the parking brake.

lShift the shift lever to P.

lStop the engine.

lTurn on the emergency flashers.

nLocation of the spare tire

nLocation of the jack and tools

Regular Cab models

Tool bag

Jack

When trouble arises

613

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Double Cab models without storage box

Double Cab models with storage box

CrewMax models

Too l b ag

Jack

Tool bag

Jack

Tool bag

Jack

614

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack and tool bag (Regular Cab models)

Pull the lever and fold down the

seatback.

Remove the cover.

Unhook the strap and remove

the tool bag.

When trouble arises

615

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Unhook the strap.

Loosen and remove the jack.

Loosen

Tighten

Taking out the jack and tool bag (Double Cab models)

Pull up the lever.

Raise the bottom cushion up.

616

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Vehicles with storage box

Turn the knob to the OPEN

direction.

Remove the lid.

Vehicles with storage box

Remove the jack cover panel.

Unhook the strap. Loosen and

remove the jack.

Loosen

Tighten

Unhook the strap and remove

the tool bag.

When trouble arises

617

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack and tool bag (CrewMax models)

Pull the lever and fold down the

seatback.

Remove the cover.

Unhook the strap and remove

the tool bag.

Unhook the strap.

618

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Loosen and remove the jack.

Loosen

Tighten

Assemble the jack handle (in the tool bag)

Assemble the jack handle exten-

sion as shown.

When trouble arises

619

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the spare tire

Insert the end of the jack handle

extension into the lowering

screw and turn it counterclock-

wise.

After the tire is lowered com-

pletely to the ground, remove

the holding bracket.

620

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

Flat tire

Wheel

chock

positions

Front

Left-

hand

side

Behind the

rear right-

hand side

tire

Right-

hand

side

Behind the

rear left-

hand side

tire

Rear

Left-

hand

side

In front of

the front

right-hand

side tire

Right-

hand

side

In front of

the front

left-hand

side tire

When trouble arises

621

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Assemble the jack handle exten-

sion as shown.

Position the jack at the correct

jack point as shown.

Front

Rear

Make sure the jack is positioned

on a level and solid place.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is

slightly raised off the ground.

When positioning the jack under

the rear axle housing, make

sure the groove on the top of

the jack fits with the rear axle

housing.

Remove all the wheel nuts and

the tire.

When resting the tire on the

ground, place the tire so that the

wheel design faces up to avoid

scratching the wheel surface.

Front

622

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the tire

Remove any dirt or foreign mat-

ter from the wheel contact sur-

face.

If foreign matter is on the wheel

contact surface, the wheel nuts

may loosen while the vehicle is

in motion, and the tire may

come off the vehicle.

Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by

approximately the same amount.

Replacing a steel wheel with a steel wheel

Tighten the nuts until the tapered

portion comes into loose contact

with the bolt seat in the disc

wheel.

Replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel

Tighten the nuts until the tapered

portion comes into loose contact

with the bolt seat in the disc

wheel.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel

Tapered portion

Disc wheel

When trouble arises

623

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each nut two or

three times in the order shown in

the illustration.

Tightening torque

Flat washer type (Aluminum

wheels)

97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)*

Taper type (Steel wheels)

154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3

kgf·m)

*: When temporarily used on

spare tire/wheel, apply 154

ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)

624

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools

Remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the

reverse side.

Lay down the tire with the outer side facing up, and install the

holding bracket.

Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up

without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying for-

ward during a collision or sudden braking.

Keep winding until three clicks are heard.

Stow the tools and jack securely.

nAfter completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 548)

nWhen using the temporary spare tire

As the temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warn-

ing valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not

be warned. Also, if you replace the temporary spare tire after the tire

pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

CAUTION

nUsing the jack

Improper use of the jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the

vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.

lDo not use the jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or install-

ing and removing tire chains.

lOnly use the jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other jacks for replac-

ing tires on this vehicle.

lAlways check that the jack is securely set to the jack point.

lDo not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

lDo not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the

jack.

When trouble arises

625

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

nUsing the jack

lDo not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

lWhen raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

lDo not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to

replace the tire.

lUse a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one

working on or near the vehicle will be injured.

nUsing the jack handle

Insert the square head securely until you hear a click to prevent the

extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.

nReplacing a flat tire

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious

injury.

lRetighten the wheel nuts within 100 miles (160 km) of driving. Other-

wise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could

cause a serious accident.

lLower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from

under the vehicle.

lDo not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in

handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

lNever use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,

leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can

cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a

serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or

wheel nuts.

626

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

nReplacing a flat tire

lHave the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench as soon as possi-

ble after changing wheels.

Steel wheel: 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)

Aluminum wheel: 97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and

the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death

or serious injury.

lDo not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the

wheel while the vehicle is moving.

nWhen using the temporary spare tire

lRemember that your temporary spare tire is specifically designed for

use with your vehicle. Do not use your temporary spare tire on another

vehicle.

lDo not use two temporary spare tires simultaneously.

lReplace the temporary spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-

ble.

lAvoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp

cornering.

nSpeed limit when using the temporary spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a temporary

spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Fail-

ing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or

serious injury.

nDriving with tire chains and the temporary spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the temporary spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving

performance.

When trouble arises

627

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

nWhen the spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-

tems may not operate correctly:

lABS & Brake assist

lVSC

lTRAC

lA-TRAC

lAUTO LSD

lCruise control

lNavigation system

Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actu-

ally negatively effect the drive-train components:

l4WD system

NOTICE

nDo not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the

wheel beyond repair.

nWhen replacing the tires

lWhen removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled cor-

rectly.

lReplace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and trans-

mitters as well.

nTo avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

628

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start

If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting

procedure (→P. 181) or releasing the steering lock (→P. 182), confirm

the following points.

nThe engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-

ates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

lThere may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle. (→P. 107)

Flex-fuel vehicles: The type of fuel may be different. When

refueling, add the same type of fuel, if available.

After adding a different type of fuel, the engine may run

roughly and driving performance may be reduced for a while

when the engine is first started. In this case, wait until the

engine runs normally.

lThe engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting

procedures.

lThere may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

(→P. 11 2 )

nThe starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and

headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at

a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

lThe battery may be discharged. (→P. 634)

lThe battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

When trouble arises

629

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

nThe starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and

headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

lOne or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

lThe battery may be discharged. (→P. 634)

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if

repair procedures are unknown.

630

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there

may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent

accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to

ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch to the ACC or ON position.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.

Floor shift type

When trouble arises

631

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Column-shift type

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

Floor shift type

632

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Column-shift type

When trouble arises

633

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you lose your keys

nIf you lose all your master keys. (vehicles with engine immobilizer sys-

tem)

You cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be

replaced.

New genuine Toyota keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using

the key number stamped on your key number plate. Vehicles with

engine immobilizer system, the dealer will also need the master key.

(→P. 42)

634

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the

vehicle’s battery is discharged.

You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-

cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following

the steps below.

Connect the jumper cables.

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) and 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engines

When trouble arises

635

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

nStarting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

nAvoiding a discharged battery

lTurn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned

off.

lTurn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-

ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

nWhen the battery is removed or discharged

lThe moon roof must be initialized. (→P. 104)

lFlex-fuel vehicles: The information recorded in the computer will be

cleared, which may cause the engine to run roughly and reduce driving

performance for a while when the engine is first started. In this case, wait

until the engine runs normally.

If the vehicle is running on E85, the engine may stall.

In this case, restart the engine, repeatedly if necessary.

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in

the illustration.

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine

speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5

minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start

the vehicle’s engine.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper

cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-

nected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible.

636

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

nAvoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-

mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.

lMake sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it

is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-

nal.

lDo not allow a jumper cable to come into contact with both “+” and “-” ter-

minals.

lDo not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near

the battery.

nBattery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while

related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-

cautions when handling the battery.

lWhen working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care

not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing

or the vehicle body.

lDo not lean over the battery.

lIn the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,

immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention

can be received.

lAlways wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and

other battery-related parts.

lDo not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

nWhen handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan

or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

When trouble arises

637

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

If your engine overheats:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-

tioning system.

Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.

If you see steam:

Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam

subsides and then restart the engine.

If you do not see steam:

Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.

Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.

If the fan is operating:

Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the

instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the

engine.

If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and call your local Toyota

dealer.

638

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The engine has cooled down sufficiently.

The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates C.

Check the engine coolant level.

Look for obvious coolant leaks from the radiator, hoses and

under the vehicle.

Note that water draining from the air conditioning is normal if it has

been used.

Add engine coolant if required.

Water can be used in an emer-

gency if engine coolant is

unavailable. (→P. 660)

Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

When trouble arises

639

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

nOverheating

If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.

lThe engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of

power is experienced.

lSteam is coming from under the hood.

l“ENGINE COOLANT HOT” is shown on the multi-information display

(vehicles with multi-information display).

CAUTION

nTo prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of

your vehicle

lIf steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until

the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-

ing serious injury such as burns.

lKeep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the

engine is running.

lDo not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam

released under pressure.

NOTICE

nWhen adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too

quickly can cause damage to the engine.

640

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck

CAUTION

nWhen attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-

rounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.

The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes

free. Use extreme caution.

nWhen shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may

cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

nTo avoid damaging the transmission and other components

lAvoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.

lIf the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may

require towing to be freed.

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle

becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift

lever in P.

Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide

traction under the tires.

Restart the engine.

Turn off the VSC (→P. 2 4 0 , 245, 246, 247)

Shift the shift lever to D or R and carefully apply the accel-

erator to free the vehicle.

When trouble arises

641

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-

cedure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly

depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the

effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the

road.

Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce

vehicle speed as much as possible.

Stop the engine by turning the

engine switch to the ACC

position.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

642

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

nIf the engine has to be turned off while driving

lPower assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the

brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.

Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

lNever attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

644

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions

2WD models

*1: Unladen vehicle

*2: P255/70R18 tires

*3: P275/65R18 tires

*4: P275/55R20 tires

Cab type Regular Cab Double Cab

Bed type Standard Long Standard Long

Overall

length

210.2 in.

(5340 mm) 229.1 in. (5820 mm) 248.0 in.

(6300 mm)

Overall width 79.9 in. (2030 mm)

Overall

height*1

75.9 in.

(1930 mm)

75.7 in.

(1925 mm)*2

75.9 in.

(1930 mm)

75.7 in.

(1925 mm)*2

75.7 in.

(1925 mm)

*3,*4

75.5 in.

(1920 mm)*3

75.7 in.

(1925 mm)

*3,*4

75.5 in.

(1920 mm)*3

Wheelbase 126.7 in.

(3220 mm) 145.6 in. (3700 mm) 164.5 in.

(4180 mm)

Front tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm)

Rear tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm)

645

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

*1: Unladen vehicle

*2: P255/70R18 tires

*3: P275/65R18 tires

*4: P275/55R20 tires

Cab type CrewMax

Bed type Short

Overall

length 229.1 in. (5820 mm)

Overall width 79.9 in. (2030 mm)

Overall

height*1

75.7 in. (1925 mm)*2

75.5 in. (1920 mm)*3,*4

Wheelbase 145.6 in. (3700 mm)

Front tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm)

Rear tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm)

646

6-1. Specifications

4WD models

*1: Unladen vehicle

*2: P255/70R18 tires

*3: P275/65R18 tires

*4: P275/55R20 tires

Cab type Regular Cab Double Cab

Bed type Standard Long Standard Long

Overall

length

210.2 in.

(5340 mm) 229.1 in. (5820 mm) 248.0 in.

(6300 mm)

Overall width 79.9 in. (2030 mm)

Overall

height*1

76.3 in.

(1940 mm)

76.1 in.

(1935 mm)*2

76.3 in.

(1940 mm)

76.1 in.

(1935 mm)*2

76.1 in.

(1935 mm)

*3,*4

75.9 in.

(1930 mm)*3

76.1 in.

(1935 mm)

*3,*4

75.9 in.

(1930 mm)*3

Wheelbase 126.7 in.

(3220 mm) 145.6 in. (3700 mm) 164.5 in.

(4180 mm)

Front tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm)

Rear tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm)

647

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

*1: Unladen vehicle

*2: P255/70R18 tires

*3: P275/65R18 tires

*4: P275/55R20 tires

Cab type CrewMax

Bed type Short

Overall length 229.1 in. (5820 mm)

Overall width 79.9 in. (2030 mm)

Overall height*1 76.1 in. (1935 mm)*2

75.9 in. (1930 mm)*3,*4

Wheelbase 145.6 in. (3700 mm)

Front tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm)

Rear tread 67.9 in. (1725 mm)

648

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle capacity weight

Regular Cab models

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

*2: With towing package

*3: Without option

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system Bed type Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants+luggage)

GSK50L-TRADKA 4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard 1485 lb. (670 kg)

GSK51L-THADKA Long 1580 lb. (715 kg)

UPK50L-TRTDKA

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD Standard

1710 lb. (775 kg)

1635 lb. (740 kg)*2

USK51L-THTDKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD Long

1960 lb. (885 kg)

1885 lb. (855 kg)*2

2055 lb. (930 kg)*3

USK55L-TRTDKA

4WD

Standard 1595 lb. (720 kg)

1520 lb. (685 kg)*2

USK56L-THTDKA Long 1895 lb. (855 kg)

1820 lb. (825 kg)*2

USK55L-TRTDGA 5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD

Standard 1595 lb. (720 kg)

1520 lb. (685 kg)*2

USK56L-THTDGA Long 1895 lb. (855 kg)

1820 lb. (825 kg)*2

649

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Double Cab models

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

*2: With towing package

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system Bed type Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants+luggage)

GSK51L-CRASKA

4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

2WD Standard 1290 lb. (585 kg)

UPK51L-CRTSKA 4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

1410 lb. (635 kg)

1335 lb. (605 kg)*2

UPK56L-CRTSKA 4WD 1330 lb. (600 kg)

1255 lb. (565 kg)*2

USK51L-CRTSKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

1540 lb. (695 kg)

1465 lb. (660 kg)*2

USK51L-CRTLKA 1570 lb. (710 kg)

1495 lb. (675 kg)*2

USK52L-CHTSKA Long 1455 lb. (655 kg)

USK56L-CRTSKA

4WD

Standard

1455 lb. (655 kg)

1380 lb. (625 kg)*2

USK56L-CRTLKA 1485 lb. (670 kg)

1410 lb. (635 kg)*2

USK57L-CHTSKA Long 1360 lb. (615 kg)

USK56L-CRTSGA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD Standard

1455 lb. (655 kg)

1380 lb. (625 kg)*2

USK56L-CRTLGA 1485 lb. (670 kg)

1410 lb. (635 kg)*2

USK57L-CHTSGA Long 1360 lb. (615 kg)

650

6-1. Specifications

CrewMax models

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

*2: With towing package or electric moon roof

*3: With towing package and electric moon roof

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system Bed type Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants+luggage)

UPK51L-PSTSKA

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Short

1330 lb. (600 kg)

1255 lb. (565 kg)*2

1220 lb. (550 kg)*3

UPK56L-PSTSKA 4WD

1250 lb. (565 kg)

1175 lb. (530 kg)*2

1140 lb. (515 kg)*3

USK51L-PSTSKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD

1445 lb. (655 kg)

1370 lb. (620 kg)*2

1335 lb. (605 kg)*3

USK51L-PSTLKA

1495 lb. (675 kg)

1420 lb. (640 kg)*2

1385 lb. (625 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTSKA

4WD

1375 lb. (620 kg)

1300 lb. (585 kg)*2

1265 lb. (570 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTLKA

1405 lb. (635 kg)

1330 lb. (600 kg)*2

1295 lb. (585 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTSGA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD

1375 lb. (620 kg)

1300 lb. (585 kg)*2

1265 lb. (570 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTLGA

1405 lb. (635 kg)

1330 lb. (600 kg)*2

1295 lb. (585 kg)*3

651

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

Regular Cab models

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

*2: Without towing package

*3: With towing package

*4: P275/55R20 tires

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system Bed type TWR

(Trailer weight + cargo)

GSK50L-TRADKA 4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard 4900 lb. (2220 kg)

GSK51L-THADKA Long 4800 lb. (2175 kg)

UPK50L-TRTDKA

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD Standard

7100 lb. (3220 kg)*2

8600 lb. (3900 kg)*3

USK51L-THTDKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD Long 8400 lb. (3810 kg)*2

10400 lb. (4715 kg)*3

USK55L-TRTDKA

4WD

Standard

8200 lb. (3715 kg)*2

9700 lb. (4395 kg)*3

9200 lb. (4170 kg)*3,4

USK56L-THTDKA Long 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2

10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3

USK55L-TRTDGA 5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD

Standard

8200 lb. (3715 kg)*2

9700 lb. (4395 kg)*3

9200 lb. (4170 kg)*3,4

USK56L-THTDGA Long 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2

10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3

652

6-1. Specifications

Double Cab models

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

*2: Without towing package

*3: With towing package

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system Bed type TWR

(Trailer weight + cargo)

GSK51L-CRASKA

4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

2WD Standard 4500 lb. (2040 kg)

UPK51L-CRTSKA 4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

6700 lb. (3035 kg)*2

8200 lb. (3715 kg)*3

UPK56L-CRTSKA 4WD 6400 lb. (2900 kg)*2

7900 lb. (3580 kg)*3

USK51L-CRTSKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD Standard

8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2

10100 lb. (4580 kg)*3

USK51L-CRTLKA 8100 lb. (3670 kg)*2

10000 lb. (4535 kg)*3

USK52L-CHTSKA Long 10000 lb. (4535 kg)

USK56L-CRTSKA

4WD Standard

7800 lb. (3535 kg)*2

9700 lb. (4395 kg)*3

USK56L-CRTLKA 7800 lb. (3535 kg)*2

9800 lb. (4445 kg)*3

USK57L-CHTSKA Long 9800 lb. (4445 kg)

USK56L-CRTSGA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD Standard

7800 lb. (3535 kg)*2

9700 lb. (4395 kg)*3

USK56L-CRTLGA 7800 lb. (3535 kg)*2

9800 lb. (4445 kg)*3

USK57L-CHTSGA Long 9800 lb. (4445 kg)

653

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

CrewMax models

*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

*2: Without towing package

*3: With towing package

Model code*1 Engine Driving

system Bed type TWR

(Trailer weight + cargo)

UPK51L-PSTSKA 4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Short

6600 lb. (2990 kg)*2

8100 lb. (3670 kg)*3

UPK56L-PSTSKA 4WD 6200 lb. (2810 kg)*2

7700 lb. (3490 kg)*3

USK51L-PSTSKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD

8000 lb. (3625 kg)*2

9900 lb. (4490 kg)*3

USK51L-PSTLKA 7900 lb. (3580 kg)*2

9300 lb. (4215 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTSKA

4WD

7700 lb. (3490 kg)*2

9000 lb. (4080 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTLKA 7700 lb. (3490 kg)*2

9000 lb. (4080 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTSGA 5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD

7700 lb. (3490 kg)*2

9000 lb. (4080 kg)*3

USK56L-PSTLGA 7700 lb. (3490 kg)*2

9000 lb. (4080 kg)*3

654

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification

nVehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your

vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is

used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the

top left of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the Certi-

fication Label.

655

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

nEngine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) engine

5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine

656

6-1. Specifications

Engine

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) and 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engines

Model 1GR-FE

Type 6-cylinder V-type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke 3.70 × 3.74 in. (94.0 × 95.0 mm)

Displacement 241.4 cu.in. (3956 cm3)

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Valve clearance

(engine cold) Automatic adjustment

Model 1UR-FE, 3UR-FE, 3UR- FBE

Type 8-cylinder V-type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) engine

3.70 × 3.27 in. (94.0 × 83.0 mm)

5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine

3.70 × 4.02 in. (94.0 × 102.0 mm)

Displacement

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) engine

281.2 cu.in. (4608 cm3)

5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine

345.6 cu.in. (5663 cm3)

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Valve clearance

(engine cold) Automatic adjustment

657

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Fuel

Lubrication system

Engine Gasoline engine Flex-fuel engine

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only

Unleaded gasoline, E85,

or a blend of the two

fuels

Octane rating

(Unleaded gasoline) 87 (Research octane number 91) or higher

Ethanol percentage

(E85) ⎯85% or less

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 lmp.gal.)

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill - reference)

With filter

Without filter

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp.qt.)

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) and 5.7L V8

(3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engines

7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

5.9 qt. (5.6 L, 4.9 Imp.qt.)

4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) and 5.7L V8

(3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engines

7.4 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)

658

6-1. Specifications

nEngine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toy-

ota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the

following grade and viscosity.

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) and 4.6L V8 (1UR-FE) engines

Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for

good fuel economy and good

starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 is not available,

SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.

However, it must be replaced

with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil

change.

The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the

oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow

for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating

temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-

cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

Outside temperature

659

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

5.7L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine

Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20

SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil

may be used. However, SAE

0W-20 is the best choice for

good fuel economy and good

starting in cold weather.

The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the

oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow

for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating

temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-

cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help

you select the oil you should use.

Outside temperature

660

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Capacity

4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

11.3 qt. (10.7 L, 9.4 Imp.qt.)

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

Vehicles without towing package

12.8 qt. (12.1 L, 10.6 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles with towing package

13.9 qt. (13.2 L, 11.6 Imp. qt.)

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE,

3UR-FBE)

engine

Vehicles without towing package

12.8 qt. (12.1 L, 10.6 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles with towing package

13.7 qt. (13.0 L, 11.4 Imp. qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following.

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based

non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and

non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid

organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

661

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Ignition system

Electrical system

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSO SK20HR11

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE

nIridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

Battery

Open voltage at

68°F (20°C):

12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged

12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged

11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged

(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the

key is removed with all the lights

turned off)

Charging rates 5 A max.

662

6-1. Specifications

Differential

Oil

capacity

Front (4WD models) 2.2 qt. (2.05 L, 1.8 Imp.qt.)

Rear

4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

and 4.6L

(1UR-FE)

engines

Regular

Cab mod-

els

With standard bed

4.3 qt. (4.05 L, 3.6 Imp.qt.)

With long bed

4.9 qt. (4.60 L, 4.0 Imp.qt.)

Double

Cab and

Crew-

Max

models

4.9 qt. (4.60 L, 4.0 Imp.qt.)

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE,

3UR-FBE)

engine

Regular

Cab mod-

els

With standard bed

3.7 qt. (3.50 L, 3.1 Imp.qt.)

With long bed

3.8 qt. (3.60 L, 3.2 Imp.qt.)

Double

Cab mod-

els

With standard bed

3.8 qt. (3.60 L, 3.2 Imp.qt.)

With long bed

4.0 qt. (3.75 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)

Crew-

Max

models

2WD models

4.0 qt. (3.75 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)

4WD models

3.8 qt. (3.60 L, 3.2 Imp.qt.)

Oil type and viscosity

Toyota Genuine Differential Gear

Oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equiva-

lent

“Toyota Genuine Differential

Gear Oil” is filled in your Toyota

vehicle at factory fill. Use Toyota

approved “Toyota Genuine

Differential Gear Oil” or an

equivalent of matching quality to

satisfy the above specification.

Please contact your Toyota

dealer for further details.

663

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Automatic transmission

*:The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary,

contact your Toyota dealer.

Transfer (4WD models)

Fluid

capacity*

4.0L V6 (1GR-FE) engine 11.1 qt. (10.5 L, 9.2 Imp.qt.)

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

Vehicles without

towing package

2WD models

11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp.qt.)

4WD models

11.3 qt. (10.7 L, 9.4 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles with

towing package

2WD models

12.2 qt. (11.5 L, 10.1 Imp.qt.)

4WD models

11.8 qt. (11.2 L, 9.9 Imp.qt.)

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE,

3UR-FBE)

engine

Vehicles without

towing package 11.7 qt. (11.1 L, 9.8 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles with

towing package 12.3 qt. (11.6 L, 10.2 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

nAutomatic transmission fluid type

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS”

may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission

accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmis-

sion of your vehicle.

Oil capacity 1.2 qt. (1.12 L, 1.0 Imp.qt.)

Oil type Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5

Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W-90

664

6-1. Specifications

Brakes

*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,

50 kgf) with the engine running.

*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.1 lbf (300 N,

30.6 kgf).

Chassis lubrication (4WD models)

Steering

Pedal clearance*14.1 in. (104 mm) Min.

Pedal free play 0.04 ⎯ 0.20 in. (1 ⎯ 5 mm)

Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake pedal travel*26 — 9 clicks

Fluid type FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703

Propeller shafts Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Power steering fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II

or III

665

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Tires and wheels

Type A

Type B

Tire size P255/70R18 112T

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Front tires:

30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Rear tires:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Spare tire:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 18 × 8J

Wheel nut torque

Steel wheels:

154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)

Aluminum wheels:

97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

Tire size P275/65R18 114T,

P255/70R18 112T (spare tire)

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Front tires:

30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Rear tires:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Spare tire:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 18 × 8J

Wheel nut torque

Steel wheels:

154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)

Aluminum wheels:

97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

666

6-1. Specifications

Type C

Tire size P275/55R20 111H,

P255/70R18 112T (spare tire)

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Front tires:

30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Rear tires:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Spare tire:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 20 × 8J,

18 × 8J (spare wheel)

Wheel nut torque

Steel wheels:

154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)

Aluminum wheels:

97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)

667

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Light bulbs

*: If equipped

A: HB3 halogen bulbs

B: H11 halogen bulbs

C: H10 halogen bulbs

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

F: Double end bulbs

Light Bulbs Bulb No. WType

Exterior

Headlights

(high beam) 9005 65 A

Headlights

(low beam) H11 55 B

Front fog lights*9145 45 C

Front side marker lights 168 5 D

Front turn signal/parking

lights/daytime running lights*4157NAK 28/8 E

Rear turn signal lights 3157A 27/8 E

Stop/tail and rear side

marker lights 3157 27/8 D

Back-up lights 921 18 D

License plate lights 168 4.9 D

High mounted stoplight and

cargo lamp 921 18 D

Outer foot light — 5 D

Interior

Vanity lights 7065 1.4 F

Personal/interior lights

Front — 5 D

Rear — 5 D

Foot well lighting — 1.4 D

668

6-1. Specifications

Fuel information

nFuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that

only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

Gasoline engine

Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. The

use of unleaded fuel with an octane rating lower than 87 may result

in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications

of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

Flex-fuel engine

Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline, E85, or a blend of the

two fuels.

Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91]

or higher), E85, or a blend of these two fuels is required for optimum

engine performance.

The use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87

may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to

engine damage.

The use of fuel with an ethanol concentration in excess of 85% will

have a negative impact on driving performance and can cause dam-

age to the fuel system components.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications

of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

At minimum, the E85 you use should meet the specifications of

ASTM D5798 in the U.S.A.

669

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

nIf your engine knocks

lConsult your Toyota dealer.

lYou may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-

ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

nFuel quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of fuel

you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of fuel.

If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

nGasoline quality standards

lAutomotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed

a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)

that is expected to be applied worldwide.

lThe WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emis-

sion levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.

lThe WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,

and customer satisfaction through better performance.

nE85 fuel (Flex-fuel vehicles)

lE85 fuel is a blend of 85% ethanol and 15% gasoline. However, E85

does not necessarily contain 85% ethanol. The ethanol content of E85 is

required by ASTM to be between 70% and 85%. For example, in cold cli-

mates the ethanol content of E85 may be reduced during the winter

months to maintain cold weather starting performance.

lE85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will need to fill your

fuel tank more frequently when using E85.

lThe number of fuel stations that sell E85 fuel is limited. For more infor-

mation about fueling stations, please refer to the U.S. Department of

Energy Web site.

http://www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/

nToyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

lToyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives

to avoid build-up of engine deposits.

lAll gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or

keep clean intake systems.

670

6-1. Specifications

nToyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy-

genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in

many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately

blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent

vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

nToyota does not recommend blended gasoline (Gasoline engine)

lToyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygen-

ate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.

lIf you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no

lower than 87.

lToyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

nToyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel

containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely

affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If

this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

nToyota does not recommend blended gasoline (Flex-fuel engine)

Do not use non-specified fuels such as the following.

• Fuels containing methanol.

• Fuels with more than 85% ethanol.

nToyota does not recommend the use of after-market fuel additives

(Flex-fuel engine)

Do not use any after-market fuel additives when repeatedly refueling with

E85, as some after-market fuel additives are not compatible with E85.

671

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

NOTICE

nNotice on fuel quality

lDo not use improper fuels.

If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.

lDo not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic

converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

lGasoline engine: Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance

problems.

lUse of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in

engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and

should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.

nWhen use of non-specified fuels (Flex-fuel engine)

The use of non-specified fuels will have a negative impact on starting and

driving performance, and will cause damage to the fuel system components.

Therefore, do not add fuels such as the following.

• Fuels containing methanol

• Fuels with more than 85% ethanol

nFuel-related poor driveability

If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor

hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that

type of fuel.

nWhen refueling

Take care not to spill fuel.

It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

672

6-1. Specifications

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

Tire size (→P. 674)

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P. 673)

Location of treadwear indicators (→P. 676)

Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the

strands which form the plies in a tire.

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 677)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 677)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the

tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main-

tains the air pressure.

673

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)

DOT symbol*

Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identifica-

tion mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire

type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

*:The DOT symbol certifies that

the tire conforms to applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL

is a bias-ply tire.

Summer tire or all season tire (→P. 550)

An all season tire has M+S on the sidewall. A tire not marked M+S

is a summer tire.

674

6-1. Specifications

Tire size

nTypical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical

tire size.

Tire use

(P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol

(alphabet with one letter)

nTire dimensions

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

675

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Tire section names

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations

issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the

U.S.A. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota

vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as

you read this information.

nDOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety

Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be

found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder

and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

676

6-1. Specifications

nTreadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear

rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-

fied government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)

times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due

to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

nTraction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,

and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-

ing) traction.

nTemperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-

ing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to

dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-

fied indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passen-

ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-

ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

677

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a

tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-

ure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pres-

sure

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been

parked for three hours or more, or has not

been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under

that condition

Maximum inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a

tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of

the tire

Recommended infla-

tion pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a

manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those stan-

dard items which may be replaced) of trans-

mission, power steering, power brakes, power

windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the

extent that these items are available as factory-

installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard

equipment, including the maximum capacity of

fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight optional

engine

Maximum loaded vehi-

cle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

Normal occupant

weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants

specified in the second column of Table 1* that

follows

678

6-1. Specifications

Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-

fied in the third column of Table 1* below

Production options

weight

The combined weight of installed regular pro-

duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in

excess of the standard items which they

replace, not previously considered in curb

weight or accessory weight, including heavy

duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty

battery, and special trim

Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube

assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a

rim by style or code

Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity

weight (Total load

capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.

(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating

capacity

Vehicle maximum load

on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined

by distributing to each axle its share of the

maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing

by two

Vehicle normal load

on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined

by distributing to each axle its share of curb

weight, accessory weight, and normal occu-

pant weight (distributed in accordance with

Tabl e 1* below), and dividing by two

Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the

inflated tire

Tire related term Meaning

679

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Bead

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,

wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is

shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components

in the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that

extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles

substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen-

terline of the tread

Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall

rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or

sidewall

Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-

pounds

Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-

liner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire

and rim system in which the rim is designed

with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the

tire is designed to fit on the underside of the

rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges

inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and

at higher inflation pressures than the corre-

sponding standard tire

Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a

tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium

within the tire

Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material

in the carcass

Tire related term Meaning

680

6-1. Specifications

Intended outboard

sidewall

(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears

white lettering, or bears manufacturer,

brand, and/or model name molding that is

higher or deeper than the same molding on

the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b)The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima-

rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or

multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry

for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-

missible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible

inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which

a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical

dimension requirements

Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or

innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of

the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva-

tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective

bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul-

tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that

have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of

10,000 lb. or less

Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Tire related term Meaning

681

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja-

cent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-

cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,

when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-

vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid

that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that

extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90

degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and

at higher inflation pressures than the corre-

sponding standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of

the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-

vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-

tive bands

Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and

bead

Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the

cord material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or

greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-

1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when

using the snow traction test as described in

ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for

Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line

on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which

is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at

least one sidewall

Tes t ri m

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and

may be any rim listed as appropriate for use

with that tire

Tire related term Meaning

682

6-1. Specifications

*:Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load

for various designated seating capacities

Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact

with the road

Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially

around a tire

Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators

(TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the

degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire

assembly securely during testing

Designated seating

capacity, Number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

Occupant distribution

in a normally loaded

vehicle

2 through 4 22 in front

5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second

seat

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1

in fourth seat

16 through 20 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1

in fourth seat

Tire related term Meaning

683

Vehicle specifications

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

Wireless

remote con-

trol

(→P. 4 4 )

Wireless remote control ON OFF

Unlocking operation

Driver’s door

unlocked in one

step, all doors

unlocked in two

steps

All doors

unlocked in one

step

Automatic door lock

function to be activated

if door is not opened

after being unlocked

ON OFF

Time elapsed before

automatic door lock

function is activated if

door is not opened after

being unlocked

60 seconds

0 seconds

30 seconds

120 seconds

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers) ON OFF

Operation signal

(Buzzer) ON OFF

Panic function ON OFF

Buzzer sounds when

pushing LOCK with any

door not closed

ON OFF

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-

sonalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences

requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an autho-

rized Toyota dealership.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions

being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

684

6-2. Customization

Door lock

(→P. 47)

Speed-detecting auto-

matic door lock function ON OFF

Opening driver’s door

unlocks all doors. OFF ON

Shifting gears to “P”

unlocks all doors. ON OFF

Shifting gears to posi-

tion other than “P” locks

all doors.

OFF ON

Unlocking using a key

Driver’s door

unlocked in one

step, all doors

unlocked in two

steps

All doors

unlocked in one

step

Moon roof

(→P. 102)

Door key linked opera-

tion Open and close

Open only

Close only

OFF

Linked operation of

components when door

key is used

Slide only Tilt only

Automatic

light off

system

(→P. 212)

Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5

Time elapsed before

headlights automati-

cally turn off after doors

are closed

30 seconds

0 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

685

6-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

Illumination

(→P. 446)

Time elapsed before

lights turn off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation after the

engine is off ON OFF

Operation when the

doors are unlocked ON OFF

Seat Belt

Reminder

Buzzer

(→P. 601)

Vehicle speed linked

seat belt reminder

buzzer

ON OFF

686

6-2. Customization

Items to initialize

Item When to initialize Reference

Moon roof

• After reconnecting or changing

the battery

• After changing a fuse

P. 102

Engine oil maintenance

data After changing engine oil P. 537

Tire pressure warning sys-

tem

• When rotating the tires on vehi-

cles differing with front and rear

tire inflation pressures.

• When changing the tire inflation

pressure by changing traveling

speed or load weight, etc.

• When changing the tire size.

P. 547

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation

in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is

performed on the vehicle.

688

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)

in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:

1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-

not become involved in individual problems between you, your

dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free

at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safer-

car.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave,

S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

689

For owners

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions

extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in

English.

690

691

For owners

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions

extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instruc-

tions in English.

692

693

For owners

694

695

For owners

696

697

For owners

698

699

For owners

700

701

For owners

702

703

For owners

704

705

For owners

Camper information

Center of gravity location

The figures given in the illustration indicate the recommended center

of gravity zone.

Regular Cab models with standard bed

Recommended location for

cargo center of gravity for

cargo weight rating

Rear end of truck bed

Regular Cab models with long bed

Recommended location for

cargo center of gravity for

cargo weight rating

Rear end of truck bed

This information has been prepared in accordance with regula-

tion issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchas-

ers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with infor-

mation on truck-camper loading. Your Toyota dealer will help

answer any questions you may have as you read this informa-

tion.

706

Double Cab models with standard bed

Recommended location for

cargo center of gravity for

cargo weight rating

Rear end of truck bed

Double Cab models with long bed

Recommended location for

cargo center of gravity for

cargo weight rating

Rear end of truck bed

CrewMax models

Recommended location for

cargo center of gravity for

cargo weight rating

Rear end of truck bed

Regular Cab models

42.6 in. (1082mm) 37.6 in. (955 mm)

Double Cab models

CrewMax models

707

For owners

Cargo weight rating and proper matching

When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load

of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the

weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the

manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo,

and the weight of passengers in the camper.

The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating

and the camper’s center of gravity should fall within the truck’s rec-

ommended center of gravity zone when installed.

Camper center of gravity

Recommended center of grav-

ity location zone

CAUTION

nLoading precaution

If a load is too far back, it can cause dangerous handling. If it is too far

forward, the front axle may be overloaded.

708

nCargo weight rating

CWR: Cargo Weight Rating

Engine Drive Cab Bed Grade Passenger

number

C.W.R

(lbs) (kg)

1GR-

FE 2WD

Regular

Standard

Delux

3 1045 474

Long 3 1125 510

1UR-

FE 2WD Standard 3 1205 547

3UR-

FBE

2WD Long 3 1450 658

4WD Standard 3 1080 490

Long 3 1385 628

709

For owners

CWR: Cargo Weight Rating

Engine Drive Cab Bed Grade Passenger

number

C.W.R

(lbs) (kg)

1GR-

FE 2WD

Double

Standard SR5 6 400 181

1UR-

2WD Standard SR5 6 440 200

4WD Standard SR5 6 355 161

3UR-

FE 2WD Standard SR5 6 575 261

Limited 5 765 347

Long SR5 6 555 252

3UR-

FBE

4WD Standard SR5 6 495 225

Limited 5 680 308

Long SR5 6 465 211

710

CWR: Cargo Weight Rating

Engine Drive Cab Bed Grade Passenger

number

C.W.R

(lbs) (kg)

1UR-

2WD

Crew

Max Short

SR5 6 325 147

4WD SR5 6 250 113

3UR-

FE 2WD SR5 6 460 209

Limited 5 665 302

3UR-

FBE

4WD

SR5 6 390 177

Limited 5 560 254

CAUTION

nOverloading

Be careful — overloading can cause dangerous braking and handling

problems, and can damage your vehicle and its tires.

711

For owners

Gross axle and vehicle weight ratings

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the bal-

ance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a

scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to

determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either

of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads

should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These

ratings are given on the vehicle certification label which is located on

the door latch post on the left side of the vehicle. (→P. 654) If weight

ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights

below the ratings.

Gross axle weight rating

Front GAWR

Rear GAWR

Gross vehicle weight rating

Not exceed GVWR

712

nGAWR and GVWR

Regular Cab models

∗: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

Model code∗Engine

Driving

system

Bed

type

GAWR GVWR

Front Rear

GSK50L-

TRADKA 4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

3900 lb.

(1765 kg)

3700 lb.

(1675 kg)

6200 lb.

(2810 kg)

GSK51L-

THADKA Long 3800 lb.

(1720 kg)

6400 lb.

(2900 kg)

UPK50L-

TRTDKA

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

3900 lb.

(1765 kg)

3950 lb.

(1790 kg)

6600 lb.

(2990 kg)

USK51L-

THTDKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD Long 3900 lb.

(1765 kg)

4150 lb.

(1880 kg)

7000 lb.

(3175 kg)

USK55L-

TRTDKA 4WD

Standard

4000 lb.

(1810 kg)

4050 lb.

(1835 kg)

6800 lb.

(3080 kg)

USK56L-

THTDKA Long 4150 lb.

(1880 kg)

7200 lb.

(3265 kg)

USK55L-

TRTDGA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD

Standard

4000 lb.

(1810 kg)

4050 lb.

(1835 kg)

6800 lb.

(3080 kg)

USK56L-

THTDGA Long 4150 lb.

(1880 kg)

7200 lb.

(3265 kg)

713

For owners

Double Cab models

∗: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

Model code∗Engine

Driving

system

Bed

type

GAWR GVWR

Front Rear

GSK51L-

CRASKA

4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

3900 lb.

(1765 kg)

3800 lb.

(1720 kg)

6400 lb.

(2900 kg)

UPK51L-

CRTSKA 4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

3900 lb.

(1765 kg)

4000 lb.

(1810 kg)

6700 lb.

(3035 kg)

UPK56L-

CRTSKA 4WD 4000 lb.

(1810 kg)

4100 lb.

(1855 kg)

6900 lb.

(3125 kg)

USK51L-

CRTSKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Standard

3900 lb.

(1765 kg)

4100 lb.

(1855 kg)

6900 lb.

(3125 kg)

USK51L-

CRTLKA

USK52L-

CHTSKA Long 4150 lb.

(1880 kg)

7000 lb.

(3175 kg)

USK56L-

CRTSKA

4WD

Standard

4000 lb.

(1810 kg)

4150 lb.

(1880 kg)

7100 lb.

(3220 kg)

USK56L-

CRTLKA

USK57L-

CHTSKA Long 7200 lb.

(3265 kg)

USK56L-

CRTSGA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD

Standard

4000 lb.

(1810 kg)

4150 lb.

(1880 kg)

7100 lb.

(3220 kg)

USK56L-

CRTLGA

USK57L-

CHTSGA Long 7200 lb.

(3265 kg)

714

CrewMax models

∗: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (→P. 654)

Model code∗Engine

Driving

system

Bed

type

GAWR GVWR

Front Rear

UPK51L-

PSTSKA 4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

engine

2WD

Short

3900 lb.

(1765 kg)

4050 lb.

(1835 kg)

6800 lb.

(3080 kg)

UPK56L-

PSTSKA 4WD 4000 lb.

(1810 kg)

4150 lb.

(1880 kg)

7000 lb.

(3175 kg)

USK51L-

PSTSKA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FE)

engine

2WD 3900 lb.

(1765 kg)

4150 lb.

(1880 kg)

7000 lb.

(3175 kg)

USK51L-

PSTLKA

USK56L-

PSTSKA 4WD 4000 lb.

(1810 kg)

7200 lb.

(3265 kg)

USK56L-

PSTLKA

USK56L-

PSTSGA

5.7L V8

(3UR-FBE)

engine

4WD 4000 lb.

(1810 kg)

4150 lb.

(1880 kg)

7200 lb.

(3265 kg)

USK56L-

PSTLGA

718

Alphabetical index

A/C.....................................292, 301

ABS ...........................................243

Accessory meter......................209

Active traction control

system ....................................243

Air conditioning filter...............560

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter..............560

Automatic air conditioning

system ................................292

Manual air conditioning

system ................................301

Airbags

Airbag operating

conditions............................122

Airbag precautions for your

child ....................................126

Airbag warning light...............600

Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions............123

Curtain shield airbag

precautions .........................126

Front passenger occupant

classification system ...........135

General airbag

precautions .........................126

Locations of airbags ..............119

Modification and disposal

of airbags ............................130

Passenger airbag off

switch..........................131, 150

Proper driving

posture........................117, 126

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbag off switch..................133

Side airbag operating

conditions............................123

Side airbag precautions ........126

SRS airbags ..........................119

Alarm......................................... 114

Antenna ............................323, 516

Anti-lock brake system

ABS warning light..................600

Anti-lock brake system..........243

Armrest ..................................... 496

Audio input............................... 360

Audio remote controls ............362

Audio system

Antenna.................................323

Audio input ............................360

Audio visual input..................407

AUX port ...............................360

A/V input port ........................407

CD player/changer ................ 326

DVD player............................390

iPod....................................... 343

MP3/WMA disc ..................... 335

Optimal use...........................356

Portable music player ...........360

Radio.....................................318

Rear seat entertainment

system ................................ 381

Steering wheel audio

switch.................................. 362

Type ...................................... 314

USB memory.........................349

Audio visual input....................407

AUTO LSD system ................... 240

Automatic light control

system .................................... 215

Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission......... 184

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ..................... 630

TOW/HAUL switch ................187

AUX port ...................................360

Auxiliary boxes ....................... 473

A/V input port...........................407

719

Alphabetical index

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs ............ 582

Wattage ................................ 667

Back window

Back window .......................... 98

Power back window................ 99

Back window defogger ........... 311

Battery

Charging system warning

light .................................... 599

Checking .............................. 543

If the vehicle has

discharged battery ............. 634

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 261

Bluetooth® audio..................... 365

Bluetooth® phone ................... 417

Bottle holders.......................... 471

Brakes

Brake system warning

buzzer ................................ 599

Brake system warning

light .................................... 599

Fluid...................................... 540

Parking brake ....................... 190

Brake assist............................. 243

Break-in tips ............................ 173

Camper information ................ 705

Card holder.............................. 457

Care

Exterior ................................. 516

Interior .................................. 519

Seat belts ............................. 520

Cargo capacity ........................ 259

Cargo hooks ............................ 501

Cargo lamp

Replacing light bulbs ............ 583

Switch................................... 450

Wattage ................................ 667

CD changer

CD .........................................326

MP3.......................................335

WMA disc ..............................335

CD player ..................................326

Certification label.............269, 654

Chains .......................................262

Child restraint system

Booster seats, definition........142

Booster seats, installation .....159

Convertible seats,

definition .............................142

Convertible seats,

installation...........................158

Front passenger occupant

classification system ...........135

Infant seats, definition ...........142

Infant seats, installation.........157

Installing CRS with lower

anchorages.........151, 154, 155

Installing CRS with seat

belts ....................................157

Installing CRS with top

tether straps........160, 162, 166

Passenger airbag off

switch..........................131, 150

Child safety

Airbag precautions ................126

Battery precautions .......544, 636

Child restraint system............142

Child-protectors.......................49

How your child should wear

the seat belt ..........................80

Installing child restraints........148

Moon roof precautions ..........106

Power window lock switch.......96

Power window precautions .....97

Removed wireless

remote control battery

precautions .........................564

Seat belt extender

precautions ...........................82

Seat belt precautions ..............80

720

Alphabetical index

Seat heater

precautions .................493, 495

Child-protectors .........................49

Cleaning

Exterior..................................516

Interior ...................................519

Seat belts ..............................520

Clock ........................................ 480

Compass...................................510

Condenser ................................540

Console box .............................455

Cooling system

Engine overheating ...............637

CRS ...........................................142

Cruise control...........................220

Cup holders..............................468

Curtain shield airbags .............119

Customizable features.....205, 683

Daytime running light

system ....................................214

Deck hooks...............................500

Defogger

Back window .........................311

Side mirrors...................309, 311

Dimension.................................644

Dinghy towing ..........................288

Display

Trip information .....................203

Warning message .................608

Do-it-yourself maintenance.....528

Doors

Door glasses ...........................94

Door lock ...........................44, 47

Open door warning........601, 609

Side doors ...............................47

Side mirrors.............................89

Driver’s seat belt reminder

buzzer .....................................601

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light.........................601

Driving

Break-in tips ..........................173

Correct posture .....................117

Driving assist systems ..........243

Procedures............................172

Winter driving tips ................. 261

Driving position memory ..........68

DVD player................................390

Emergency flashers.................588

Emergency flashers switch .... 588

Emergency, in case of

Blown fuse ............................ 565

If the engine will not start ......628

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted ................................. 630

If the vehicle has

discharged battery..............634

If the warning buzzer

sounds................................599

If the warning light turns

on........................................599

If the warning message

is displayed.........................608

If you have a flat tire .............612

If you lose your keys ............. 633

If you think something

is wrong .............................. 595

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ................................... 640

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency ...641

If your vehicle needs to

be towed ............................. 589

If your vehicle overheats.......637

Engine

Compartment ........................ 533

Engine switch........................ 181

Exhaust gas ..........................178

Hood .....................................532

How to start the

engine................................. 181

Identification number.............655

721

Alphabetical index

If the engine will not start...... 628

Ignition switch ...................... 181

Immobilizer system............... 112

Overheating.......................... 637

Warning light ........................ 600

Engine coolant

Capacity ............................... 660

Checking .............................. 539

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 261

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ..................................... 192

Engine immobilizer system.... 112

Engine oil

Capacity ............................... 657

Checking .............................. 535

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 261

Warning light ........................ 599

Engine oil maintenance

data ........................................ 537

Engine switch.......................... 181

Event data recorder ................ 597

FFV ................................... 107, 668

Flex-fuel ........................... 107, 668

Flexible fuel vehicle ........ 107, 668

Floor mat.................................. 498

Fluid

Brake .................................... 540

Washer ................................. 545

Fog lights

Replacing light bulbs ............ 581

Switch................................... 216

Wattage ................................ 667

Four-wheel drive system........ 236

Front fog lights

Replacing light bulbs ............ 581

Switch................................... 216

Wattage ................................ 667

Front passenger occupant

classification system ............135

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light.........................601

Front passenger’s seat belt

warning buzzer ..............601, 603

Front seats

Adjustment ..............................58

Front side marker lights

Replacing light bulbs .............580

Switch....................................212

Wattage.................................667

Front turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs .............579

Switch....................................189

Wattage.................................667

Fuel

Capacity ................................657

Fuel gauge ............................192

Fuel pump shut off system....596

Gas station information .........732

Information ............................668

Refueling ...............................107

Type ......................................657

Warning light .........................601

Warning message .................609

Fuel door...................................107

Fuel filler door ..........................107

Fuel pump shut off system .....596

Fuses.........................................565

Garage door opener.................503

Gas station information...........732

Gauges......................................192

Glove box..................................453

722

Alphabetical index

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone) ................417

Hazard lights switch ................588

Head restraints

Adjusting ................................71

Headlights

Replacing light bulbs.....577, 578

Switch....................................212

Wattage.................................667

High mounted stoplight

Replacing ..............................583

Wattage.................................667

Heaters

Seat heaters..........................492

Seat heaters and

ventilators ...........................494

Side mirror.....................309, 311

Hood..........................................532

Hooks

Cargo net ..............................501

Deck hooks ...........................500

Shopping bag........................501

Horn...........................................191

I/M test.......................................527

Identification

Engine ...................................655

Tire ........................................673

Vehicle ..................................654

Ignition switch..........................181

Illuminated entry system.........446

Immobilizer system..................112

Indicator lights .........................198

Initialization

Items to initialize....................686

Engine oil maintenance

data.....................................537

Moon roof ..............................104

Tire pressure warning

system ...............................548

Inside rear view mirror ..............86

Interior lights

Interior lights .........446, 447, 448

Personal lights ......446, 447, 448

Switch ...................................447

Wattage.................................667

Instrument panel light

control ....................................197

Intuitive parking assist............223

Jack

Positioning the jack ...............620

Vehicle-equipped jack...........612

Jack handle ..............................618

Keyless entry .............................44

Keys

Engine switch........................ 181

If you lose your keys ............. 633

Ignition switch .......................181

Keyless entry ..........................44

Key number.............................42

Keys ........................................ 42

Wireless remote control ..........44

License plate lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 584

Switch ...................................212

Wattage.................................667

Light bulbs

Replacing .............................. 576

Wattage.................................667

Lights

Automatic light off system..... 215

Cargo lamp switch ................ 450

Emergency flasher

switch.................................. 588

Fog light switch .....................216

Hazard light switch................ 588

Headlight switch....................212

Instrument panel light

control dial .......................... 197

Interior light switch ........ 447, 448

723

Alphabetical index

Outer foot lights .................... 446

Personal light switch............. 448

Replacing light bulbs ............ 576

Turn signal lever................... 189

Vanity lights.......................... 479

Wattage ................................ 667

Load capacity .......................... 259

Lock steering column ............. 182

Luggage storage box...... 451, 475

Luggage compartment

features.................................. 500

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself

maintenance ...................... 528

General maintenance........... 524

Maintenance data................. 644

Maintenance requirements... 522

Vehicle exterior..................... 516

Vehicle interior...................... 519

Malfunction indicator lamp .... 600

Manual air conditioning

system ................................... 301

Manual headlight leveling

dial.......................................... 213

Master warning light ....... 601, 608

Map holder ............................... 460

Meter

Accessory meter................... 209

Instrument panel light

control ................................ 197

Meters .................................. 192

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror............ 86

Side mirror heaters....... 309, 311

Side mirrors ............................ 89

Vanity mirrors ....................... 479

Moon roof................................. 102

MP3 disc................................... 335

Multi-information

display ................................... 203

Noise from under vehicle ..........36

Odometer ..................................192

Off-road precautions ...............251

Oil

Engine oil ..............................535

Warning light .................599, 603

Opener

Hood......................................532

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding...............89

Outside temperature

display ....................................481

Overhead console....................467

Overheating, Engine ................637

Parking assist...........................223

Parking brake ...........................190

Parking lights

Replacing light bulbs .............579

Switch....................................212

Wattage.................................667

Passenger airbag off switch

Installing the child restraint

system ................................150

Passenger airbag off switch

precautions .........................144

Passenger airbag off

switch..................................131

Passenger risk group ............132

Pen holder ................................463

Personal lights

Switch....................................447

Wattage.................................667

Power back window...................99

Power outlet .....................483, 488

Power steering

Fluid ..............................542, 664

Power windows ..........................94

724

Alphabetical index

Radiator ....................................540

Radio .........................................318

Rear seat

Adjustment ..............................63

Folding down...........................65

Raising the bottom cushion.....64

Rear seat entertainment

system ....................................381

Rear seat entertainment

system controller battery......387

Rear side marker lights

Replacing light bulbs .............582

Switch....................................212

Rear seat adjustment.................63

Rear seat adjustment

precautions ..............................66

Rear turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs .............582

Switch....................................189

Wattage.................................667

Rear view mirror

Anti-glare...........................86, 92

Compass ...............................510

Rear view monitor

system ....................................229

Rear window.........................98, 99

Replacing

Fuses ....................................565

Light bulbs.............................576

Tires ......................................612

Wireless remote control

battery.................................563

Wheels ..................................558

Rear step bumper ......................56

Reporting safety defects

for U.S.A. owners...................688

Roll sensing of curtain

shield airbags off switch.......133

Seatback table..........................497

Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt.............75

ALR .........................................79

Automatic Locking

Retractor...............................79

Child restraint system

installation...........................148

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belts ......................520

ELR .........................................79

Emergency Locking

Retractor...............................79

How to wear your seat belt .....75

How your child should wear

the seat belt..........................80

Pregnant women,

proper seat belt use..............79

Reminder buzzer................... 601

Reminder light....................... 601

Seat belt extenders .................80

Seat belt pretensioners...........78

Seat heaters .............................492

Seat heaters and

ventilators ..............................494

Seating capacity ...................... 259

Seats

Adjustment ........................58, 63

Adjustment precautions ....62, 66

Child seats/child restraint

system installation ..............148

Cleaning................................ 519

Folding down the rear

seat....................................... 65

Folding down the rear seat

precaution.............................66

Folding passenger’s seat

(vehicles with seatback

table).....................................61

Front seat adjustment ............. 58

Front seat adjustment

precautions ........................... 62

725

Alphabetical index

Driver’s seat position

memory ................................ 68

Head restraint......................... 71

Properly sitting in the seat.... 117

Raising the bottom

cushion................................. 64

Seat heaters ......................... 492

Seat heaters and

ventilators........................... 494

Service reminder

indicators .............................. 200

Shift lever

Automatic transmission ........ 184

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted ........................... 630

Shift lock system..................... 630

Shopping bag hooks............... 501

Side airbags............................. 119

Side doors.................................. 47

Side marker lights

Replacing ..................... 580, 582

Switch................................... 212

Wattage ................................ 667

Side mirrors

Adjusting and folding .............. 89

Mirror position memory........... 68

Spare tire

Inflation pressure.................. 665

Replacing ............................. 620

Storage location ................... 612

Spark plug................................ 661

Specifications.......................... 644

Speedometer ........................... 192

SRS airbags

Curtain shield airbags........... 119

Front airbags ........................ 119

Knee airbags ........................ 119

Passenger airbag off

switch ................................. 131

Precautions .......................... 126

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbag off switch ................. 133

Side airbags ......................... 119

Steering

Column lock release................83

Steering wheel

Adjustment ..............................83

Audio switches ......................362

Steering wheel memory ..........68

Telephone switches ..............422

Stop lights

Replacing light bulbs .............582

Wattage.................................667

Storage feature.........................451

Storage precautions ................258

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................640

Sun visors.................................478

Switch

Cruise control switch .............220

Emergency flasher switch .....588

Engine switch ........................181

Fog light switch .....................216

Front-wheel drive control

switch..................................236

Ignition switch........................181

Light switches........................212

Hazard light switch ................588

Headlights switch ..................212

Passenger airbag off

switch..................................131

Power back window switch .....99

Power door lock switch ...........48

Power window switch ..............94

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbag off switch..................133

Tire pressure warning

reset switch.........................548

TOW/HAUL switch ................187

Turn signal lights ...................189

VSC OFF

switch..........240, 245, 246, 247

Window lock switch.................96

Wiper and washer switch ......217

726

Alphabetical index

Tachometer...............................192

Tailgate

Removing the tailgate .............53

Tailgate ...................................52

Tail lights

Replacing light bulbs .............582

Switch....................................212

Wattage.................................667

Talk switch................................422

Telephone switch.....................422

Theft deterrent system

Alarm.....................................114

Engine immobilizer system ...112

Tire inflation pressure .............554

Tire information

Glossary ................................677

Size .......................................674

Tire identification number......673

Uniform tire quality

grading................................675

Tires

Chains ...................................262

Checking ...............................547

Identification number.............673

If you have a flat tire..............612

Inflation pressure...........554, 665

Information ............................672

Inflation pressure sensor.......548

Replacing ..............................612

Rotating tires .........................547

Size .......................................665

Snow tires .............................261

Tire pressure warning

reset switch.........................548

Tire pressure warning

system ........................547, 602

Warning light .........................601

Tissue pocket...........................465

Tools .........................................612

Total load capacity...................259

TOW/HAUL switch ...................187

Towing

Bumper towing ......................277

Dinghy towing .......................288

Emergency towing ................ 589

Fifth wheel trailer...................275

Trailer towing ........................265

Traction control .......................243

TRAC.........................................243

Trip information .......................203

Trip meter .................................196

Turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs.....579, 582

Switch ...................................189

Wattage.................................667

Vanity lights

Vanity lights...........................479

Wattage.................................667

Vanity mirrors ..........................479

Vehicle identification

number ...................................654

Vehicle stability control ..........243

VSC ...........................................243

Warning buzzers

Brake system ........................ 599

Key reminder...................50, 603

Open door.....................601, 603

Seat belt reminder.........601, 603

Warning lights

ABS....................................... 600

Airbag system .......................600

Anti-lock brake system..........600

Automatic transmission

fluid temperature.................600

Brake assist system.............. 600

Brake system ........................ 599

Charging system................... 599

Electronic engine control

system ................................ 600

Engine oil pressure ...............599

727

Alphabetical index

Four-wheel drive system

warning buzzer................... 603

Driver’s seat belt................... 601

Front passenger occupant

classification system .......... 600

Front passenger’s

seat belt ............................. 601

Low brake fluid ..................... 599

Low engine oil pressure ....... 599

Low fuel level................ 601, 609

Low tire inflation

pressure ............................. 601

Malfunction indicator lamp.... 600

Master warning light ............. 601

Open door ............................ 601

Power steering warning

light .................................... 600

Pretensioners ....................... 600

Seat belt reminder light ........ 601

SRS airbags ......................... 600

Tire pressure warning light... 601

VSC/TRAC ........................... 600

Warning messages ................. 608

Washer

Checking .............................. 545

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 261

Switch................................... 217

Washing and waxing............... 516

Weight

Cargo capacity ..................... 259

Cargo weight rating .............. 708

Gross axle weight rating....... 712

Gross vehicle weight

rating .................................. 712

Load limits ............................ 259

Towing capacity.................... 651

Trialer Weight Rating.... 267, 651

TWR ............................. 267, 651

Vehicle capacity weight........ 648

Weight .......... 648, 651, 708, 712

Wheels...................................... 558

Window glasses ........... 94, 98, 99

Window lock switch...................96

Windows

Back window defogger ..........311

Power back window ................99

Power windows .......................94

Washer..................................217

Windshield wiper

de-icer.............................309, 311

Windshield wipers ...................217

Wireless remote control

Replacing the battery ............563

Wireless remote control ..........44

Winter driving tips ...................261

WMA disc..................................335

728

What to do if...

A tire punctures

P. 612 If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start

P. 628 If the engine will not start

P. 11 2 Engine immobilizer system

P. 634 If the vehicle battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be

moved out

P. 630 If the shift lever cannot be shifted

from P

The engine coolant temperature

gauge enters the red zone

Steam can be seen coming

from under the hood

P. 637 If your vehicle overheats

The key is lost

P. 633 If you lose your keys

The battery runs out

P. 634 If the vehicle battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked

P. 4 7 Side doors

The horn begins to sound

P. 11 4 Alarm

The vehicle is stuck in

mud or sand

P. 640 If the vehicle becomes stuck

729

What to do if...

nInstrument cluster

Vehicles with multi-information display

Vehicles without multi-information display (type A)

The warning light or indicator

light comes on

P. 599 If a warning light turns on

730

What to do if...

Vehicles without multi-information display (type B)

nCenter panel

731

What to do if...

nWarning lights

P. 601

(if equipped)

P. 599 P. 600

P. 599 P. 603

P. 600 P. 601

P. 602

P. 6 0 0 P. 601

P. 6 0 2 P. 602

P. 6 0 0 P. 601

P. 6 0 1 P. 602

*: Slip indicator comes on.

P. 6 0 2

Brake system warning

light

Power steering warning

light

Low engine oil pressure

warning light

Charging system warning

light

Master warning light

Malfunction indicator

lamp

Slip indicator*

ABS warning light

Tire pressure warning

light

Open door warning light

Engine oil replacement

reminder light

Low fuel level warning

light

SRS warning light

Driver’s seat belt reminder

light

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light

Low washer fluid

warning light

Automatic transmission

fluid temperature

warning light

The warning message is displayed

P. 608 If a warning message is displayed

732

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 532

Fuel filler door

P. 1 0 7

Tire inflation pressure

P. 665

Hood lock release lever

P. 532

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 lmp.gal.)

Fuel type P. 657

Cold tire inflation

pressure P. 6 6 5

Engine oil

capacity

(Drain and refill

- reference)

4.0L V6

(1GR-FE)

engine

qt. (L, Imp.qt.)

With filter 6.4 (6.1, 5.4)

Without filter 5.9 (5.6, 4.9)

4.6L V8

(1UR-FE)

and 5.7L V8

(3UR-FE,

3UR-FBE)

engines

qt. (L, Imp.qt.)

With filter 7.9 (7.5, 6.6)

Without filter 7.4 (7.1, 6.2)

Engine oil type P. 657

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

1-1. Key information

Keys ..................................... 42

1-2. Opening, closing and locking

the doors

Wireless remote control ....... 44

Side doors ............................ 47

Tailgate ................................ 52

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors, steering

wheel)

Front seats ........................... 58

Rear seats (Double Cab

and CrewMax models) ....... 63

Driving position memory

(driver’s seat) ..................... 68

Head restraints..................... 71

Seat belts ............................. 75

Steering wheel (manually

adjustable type).................. 83

Steering wheel

(power-adjustable type)...... 85

Anti-glare inside rear view

mirror.................................. 86

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 89

1-4. Opening and closing

the windows and moon roof

Power windows .................... 94

Back window ........................ 98

Power back window ............. 99

Moon roof ........................... 102

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap... 107

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer

system .............................. 112

Alarm .................................. 114

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture ....... 117

SRS airbags ....................... 119

Front passenger occupant

classification system......... 135

Child restraint systems ....... 142

Installing child restraints ..... 148

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle .............. 172

Engine (ignition) switch....... 181

Automatic transmission ...... 184

Turn signal lever ................. 189

Parking brake ..................... 190

Horn.................................... 191

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters ............ 192

Indicators and warning

lights ................................. 198

Multi-information display..... 203

Accessory meter................. 209

1Before driving

2When driving

2-3. Operating the lights and

wipers

Headlight switch.................. 212

Fog light switch ................... 216

Windshield wipers and

washer .............................. 217

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control...................... 220

Intuitive parking assist......... 223

Rear view monitor system... 229

Four-wheel drive system..... 236

AUTO LSD system.............. 240

Driving assist systems ........ 243

2-5. Driving information

Off-road precautions ........... 251

Cargo and luggage ............. 256

Vehicle load limits ............... 259

Winter driving tips ............... 261

Trailer towing ...................... 265

Dinghy towing ..................... 288

3-1. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning

system.............................. 292

Manual air conditioning

system.............................. 301

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers and front

windshield wiper de-icer

(if equipped on Regular

Cab and Double Cab

models) ............................ 309

Back window, outside rear

view mirror defoggers and

front windshield wiper

de-icer (if equipped on

CrewMax models) ............ 311

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types ............ 314

Using the radio ................... 318

Using the CD player ........... 326

Playing MP3 and WMA

discs ................................. 335

Operating an iPod .............. 343

Operating a USB

memory ............................ 349

Optimal use of the audio

system.............................. 356

Using the AUX port............. 360

Using the steering wheel

audio switches.................. 362

3Interior and exterior

features

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio

system

Bluetooth® audio system.... 365

Using the Bluetooth®

audio system.................... 368

Operating a Bluetooth®

enabled portable player ... 373

Setting up a Bluetooth®

enabled portable player ... 375

Bluetooth® audio system

setup ................................ 380

3-4. Using the rear audio/video

system

Rear seat entertainment

system.............................. 381

Using the DVD player

(DVD video)...................... 390

Using the DVD player

(video CD)........................ 399

Using the DVD player

(audio CD/CD text)........... 402

Using the DVD player

(MP3 discs) ...................... 404

Using the video mode ........ 407

Changing the Setup Menu

settings............................. 409

3-5. Using the hands-free phone

system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free phone system

features ............................ 417

Using the hands-free

phone system................... 421

Making a phone call ........... 429

Setting a cellular phone...... 433

Security and system

setup ................................ 437

Using the phone book ........ 440

3-6. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list.................. 446

• Personal/interior light

main switch....................... 447

• Personal/interior lights...... 448

• Cargo lamp main switch ... 450

3-7. Using the storage features

List of storage features ....... 451

• Glove boxes ..................... 453

• Console box ..................... 455

• Card holder....................... 457

• Map holder ....................... 460

• Pen holder ........................ 463

• Tissue pocket ................... 465

• Overhead console ............ 467

• Front cup holders ............. 468

• Rear cup holders .............. 470

• Bottle holders ................... 471

• Auxiliary boxes ................. 473

• Storage box ...................... 475

3-8. Other interior features

Sun visors........................... 478

Vanity mirrors ..................... 479

Clock................................... 480

Outside temperature

display .............................. 481

Power outlets (12V DC)...... 483

Power outlets (115V AC) .... 488

Seat heaters ....................... 492

Seat heaters and

ventilators ......................... 494

Armrest (CrewMax models

only).................................. 496

Seatback table.................... 497

Floor mat ............................ 498

Luggage compartment

features ............................ 500

Garage door opener ........... 503

Compass............................. 510

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior............ 516

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior............. 519

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements..................... 522

General maintenance.......... 524

Emission inspection and

maintenance (I/M)

programs........................... 527

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions ....................... 528

Hood ................................... 532

Engine compartment........... 533

Tires .................................... 547

Tire inflation pressure ......... 554

Wheels ................................ 558

Air conditioning filter............ 560

Wireless remote control

battery............................... 563

Checking and replacing

fuses ................................. 565

Light bulbs........................... 576

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers............ 588

If your vehicle needs to

be towed........................... 589

If you think something is

wrong ............................... 595

Fuel pump shut off

system.............................. 596

Event data recorder............ 597

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on

or a warning buzzer

sounds... .......................... 599

If a warning message is

displayed (vehicles with

multi-information

display)............................. 608

If you have a flat tire ........... 612

If the engine will not start.... 628

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ................... 630

If you lose your keys........... 633

If the vehicle battery is

discharged........................ 634

If your vehicle overheats .... 637

If the vehicle becomes

stuck................................. 640

If your vehicle has to

be stopped in

an emergency .................. 641

4Maintenance and care

5When trouble arises

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 644

Fuel information ................. 668

Tire information .................. 672

6-2. Customization

Customizable features ....... 683

Items to initialize................. 686

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners ................ 688

Seat belt instructions

for Canadian owners

(in French)........................ 689

SRS airbag instructions

for Canadian owners

(in French)........................ 691

Camper information............ 705

Abbreviation list........................ 716

Alphabetical index .................... 718

What to do if... ........................... 728

6Vehicle specifications

7For owners

Index

Toyota 2011 Tundra Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation